SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe...

148
R ENGINEER’S MANUAL 29320900 No.01 Sewing machine controller SC-380

Transcript of SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe...

Page 1: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

R

EN

GIN

EE

R’S

MA

NU

AL29320900

No

.01

Sew

ing machine controller

SC

-380

Page 2: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

PR

EF

AC

E

This E

ngineer’s Manual is w

ritten for the technical personnel who are responsible for the service and m

aintenance

of the machine.

The Instruction M

anual for these machines intended for the m

aintenance personnel and operators at an apparel

factory contains operating instructions in detail. And this m

anual describes “Standard A

djustment”, A

djustment

Procedures”, “R

esults of Improper A

djustment”, and other im

portant information w

hich are not covered in the

Instruction Manual.

It is advisable to use the relevant Instruction Manual and P

arts List together with this E

ngineer’s Manual w

hen

carrying out the maintenance of these m

achines.

This m

anual gives the “Standard A

djustment” on the form

er page under which the m

ost basic adjustment value

is described and on the latter page the “Results of Im

proper Adjustm

ent” under which stitching errors and

troubles arising from m

echanical failures and “How

To A

djust” are described.

Page 3: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

CO

NT

EN

TS

1. DR

IVE

UN

IT S

AF

ET

Y IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S..............................................................1

2. PO

INT

S O

F C

AU

TIO

N........................................................................................3

3. NA

ME

S O

F E

AC

H P

AR

TS

..................................................................................5

4. INS

TA

LLAT

ION

...................................................................................................61.Installation of the m

otor........................................................................................................6

2. Installation of the control box.............................................................................................6

3. Installation of the pulley..................................................................................................

....6

4. Mounting of the belt........................................................................................................

.....7

5. Installation of the protective cover.....................................................................................7

6. Installation of the position detector....................................................................................9

7. Connection of the lever unit................................................................................................

9

8. Connection of the sew

ing machine and control box......................................................

10

5. WIR

E A

ND

GR

OU

ND

ING

..................................................................................111. Insertion of the pow

er connector......................................................................................11

2. Connection of 3-phase pow

er...........................................................................................

11

3. Pow

er capacity..............................................................................................................

.....11

4. When using the 3-phase 200 V

class SC

-380 with S

ingle- phase 200 to 220 V class

..12

5. When using the single phase 100 V

SC

-380 with single phase 110 V

to 120 V

or 3-phase 200 to 220 V S

C-380 w

ith 3-phase 220 V to 240 V

........................................12

6. To change solenoid voltage

..............................................................................................13

7. When using the single-phase 220V

servomotor in the 380V

area.................................

14

6. CO

NF

IRM

AT

ION

...............................................................................................151. B

efore turning switches on…

............................................................................................15

2. Thrn on the pow

er ……

......................................................................................................16

7. AD

JUS

TM

EN

TS

................................................................................................171. A

djustment of stopping position

......................................................................................17

2. Adjustm

ent of pedal toe down pressure, and heeling pressure

....................................17

3. Adjustm

ent of operation speed.........................................................................................

18

8. PE

DA

L OP

ER

AT

ION

.........................................................................................19

9. OP

ER

AT

ION

OF

TH

E O

PE

RA

TIO

N P

AN

EL K

EY

S.........................................20

1) Displays during norm

al mode and functions of each key

..............................................20

2) Selection of each m

ode.....................................................................................................

20

3) HO

W T

O U

SE

PR

OG

RA

M M

OD

ES

[1] AN

D [2].................................................................

24

Table of sim

plified setting value for JUK

I sewing m

achine with thread trim

mer.............

25

4) How

to use the normal m

ode............................................................................................

27

5) Display and function of each key in the tacking m

ode and pattern mode.

(for lock stitch machine)..................................................................................................

..28

Page 4: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

(1) Tacking setting m

ode (At the tim

e of patter No.=

4, this mode w

ill be skipped.)...........................................

28

(2) No. of tacking stitches setting m

ode.............................................................................................................29

(3) Preset stitching setting m

ode........................................................................................................................

30

10. HO

W TO

USE TH

E PRO

GR

AM M

OD

E (EXAMPLE O

F MO

ST FREQ

UEN

TLY USIN

G)

......311) T

o change the maxim

um speed

........................................................................................31

2) To change the num

ber of stitches in slow start..............................................................

31

3) To apply a w

eak break during stopping...........................................................................

32

4) To set the standing w

ork type...........................................................................................

32

5) To change input/output port function..............................................................................

33

6) To set external one shot signal.........................................................................................

37

7) To set num

ber of stitches to the needle UP

position stop after detecting

the fabric end with an optical sensor, etc........................................................................

38

8) To continue presser foot lifting after the thread trim

ming, and to bring dow

n

the presser foot after the time set on the tim

er has passed..........................................

39

9) To set needle position higher than usual after thread trim

ming

...................................39

10)T

o adjust the correlation between toe dow

n angle speed...........................................

40

11) To run w

ithout the detector (when the detector is broken)..........................................

40

12) To adjust tacking accurately

...........................................................................................41

13) To check the error code history and input/output signal.............................................

43

14) To return all setting to the factory settings

...................................................................45

11. HO

W T

O S

ET

CO

UN

TE

R F

UN

CT

ION

............................................................461. T

o use the counter function..............................................................................................

46

2. Dow

n counter for bobbin remain thread count (10,000 stitches is count over)...........

48

3. How

to Adjust current count am

ount to use input signal..............................................

50

12. SE

TT

ING

IN T

HE

TH

RE

AD

TR

IMM

ING

MO

DE

TR

........................................511) T

hread trimm

ing timing w

hen thread trimm

ing mode T

R setting is P

RG

.....................51

2) Sew

ing machine m

otion pattern.......................................................................................

53

13. OU

TP

UT

TB

, TF

TIM

ING

S..............................................................................55

1) Output norm

al timing

.........................................................................................................

55

2) Function setting [R

U [O

N]] in program

mode P

..............................................................55

14. OU

TP

UT

KS

1, KS

2, KS

3 TIM

ING

S................................................................56

15. SIM

PLE

SE

QU

EN

CE

.......................................................................................571. S

imple sequence starting conditions

...............................................................................57

2. Sim

ple sequence output timing chart

..............................................................................57

3. When starting condition setting [S

QS

] is [NO

] (default setting)....................................58

4. Exam

ple of simple sequence setting

................................................................................58

16. CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N F

UN

CT

ION

......................................................................59

Page 5: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

1. About the com

munication

.................................................................................................59

2. Wiring

..................................................................................................................................59

3. The basic procedure

..........................................................................................................

60

4. The com

munication com

mand list

...................................................................................61

17. HOW

TO CHANG

E VOLTAG

E OF PANEL CO

NNECTOR AND SO

LENOID RETURN SPEED

..64

1. To change S

olenoid voltage 24 V/30 V

.............................................................................64

2. How

to change the output voltage DC

5 V/12 V

................................................................64

3. How

to set the switch for increasing the solenoid return speed...................................

66

18. HO

W T

O S

ET

TH

RE

AD

BR

EA

K D

ET

EC

TO

R................................................67

1. Setting T

hread break detector function...........................................................................

67

2. Tim

ing chart of thread break input and output................................................................68

19. CU

TT

ER

OU

TP

UT

...........................................................................................691) C

utter...................................................................................................................................69

2) BT

specifications (*1) operation chart and required settings........................................

70

20. TA

BLE

OF

PR

OG

RA

M M

OD

E F

UN

CT

ION

S..................................................71

21. INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

FU

NC

TIO

N F

OR

SIG

NA

L ON

C M

OD

E S

ET

TIN

G...........126

1. C m

ode input signal setting table...................................................................................126

2. C m

ode output signal setting table.................................................................................130

22. THE

CO

MP

OS

ITION

FIGU

RE

OF IN

PU

T AN

D O

UTP

UT C

US

TOM

IZATIO

N.......132

1. Input and output customization

......................................................................................132

2. Input/output direct coupling port (inside connecting port)..........................................133

3. Connector input/output com

mon port............................................................................

134

23. HO

W T

O U

SE

TH

E O

PT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TO

R.................................................135

1) Connector layout............................................................................................................

..135

2)The explanation of the input/output signal.....................................................................

137

3) To use as a standing w

ork type sewing m

achine.........................................................139

24. ER

RO

R D

ISP

LAY

..........................................................................................140

25. SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

S.........................................................................................141

<RE

FE

RE

NC

E> T

AB

EL O

F D

IGIT

AL D

ISP

LAY

................................................142

Page 6: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 1 -

1. DR

IVE

UN

IT S

AF

ET

Y IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

S

1. To ensure safe use–

Alw

ays observe the following item

s to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing m

achine drive unit SC

-380.

1.1 Before starting

–R

ead all instruction manual thoroughly before starting use of this drive unit,and follow

the Engineer’s

Manual. A

lso read the instruction manuals for the installed sew

ing machine.

1.2 Application and purpose

–T

his drive unit is designed to drive a sewing m

achine and must not be used for other applications or

purposes. Do not use this drive unit until it can be confirm

ed that safety measures for the installed

sewing m

achine have been taken.

1.3 Work environm

ent–

Use this drive unit in dry and w

ell-kept clean locations,e.g. in the clothing industry, and which process

dry sewing m

aterial.–

Avoid using this control unit in the follow

ing types of environments.

(1) Pow

er voltage–

Place w

here voltage fluctuation exceeds ±10 % of the rated voltage.

–P

lace where frequency fluctuation exceeds ± 1 %

of 50/60 Hz.

–P

lace where the specified pow

er capacity cannot be secured.(2) E

lectromagnetic noise

–P

lace where strong electric or m

agnetic fields are generated such as near a large-output high frequencyoscillator or high frequency w

elding machine.

(3) Tem

perature and humidity

–P

lace where atm

ospheric temperature is 40 ˚C

or higher and 5 ˚C or low

er.–

Place subject to direct sunlight or outdoors.

–N

ear a heat source such as a heater.–

Place w

here relative humidity is 30 %

or less and 95 % or m

ore, or where dew

condensation occurs.(4) A

tmosphere

–A

tmosphere w

ith dust or corrosive gases.–

Atm

osphere with com

bustible gases or explosive atmosphere.

(5) Altitude

–P

lace where at altitudes exceeds 1,000 m

above mean sea level.

(6) Storage

–P

lace where storage tem

perature is 55 ˚C or higher and –25 ˚C

or lower.

(7) Vibration

–If excessive vibration occurs w

hen the control box is installed on the sewing m

achine, install it separately.

2. Installation

2.1 Motor and control box

–C

orrectly install according to the attached Engineer’s M

anual.

2.2 Accessories

–A

lways disconnect this control unit from

the main pow

er supply when installing any accessories listed in

the Engineer’s M

anual. (Turn the m

ain switch O

FF

, and remove the plug from

the outlet (power supply

line).)

2.3 Cable

(1)A

rrange the connection cable so that excessive force is not applied during use, and do not excessivelybend the cable.

(2)C

ables near moving parts (e.g., pulley or V

-belt) must be w

ired at a minim

um distance of 25 m

m.

Page 7: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 2 -

(3)C

onfirm that the pow

er voltage of the power cable for supplying to the control box m

eets the specifications

on the motor and control box rating nam

eplates before connecting it to the power line. C

onnect it to the

designated places to supply the power. P

erform this step w

ith the power O

N/O

FF

switch turned O

FF

.

2.4 Grounding

(1) Correctly connect the control box grounding to the pow

er supply grounding.

2.5 Accom

panying appliances and accessories

(1) Electric accom

panying appliances and accessories must only be connected to safely low

voltage.

2.6 Rem

oval

(1)T

urn the main sw

itch OF

F and rem

ove the plug from the outlet Å

ipower supply lineÅ

jbefore removing

the motor or control box.

(2)D

o not pull on the cord when rem

oving the plug. Alw

ays hold the plug itself.

(3)T

here is a high voltage applied inside the control box, so always w

ait at least 10 minutes after running

the power sw

itch OF

F and rem

ove the plug from the outletÅ

ipower supply lineÅ

jbefore opening the

control box panel.

3. Maintenance, inspection and repairs

–F

ollow the E

ngineer’s Manual for m

aintenance and inspection of the this control unit.

–R

epairs and maintenance m

ust be done and approved by specially trained personnel.

–D

o not run this control with the ventilation openings of the m

otor’s dust-proof filter blocked or clogged

with dust, loose cloth, etc.

–A

lways turn the pow

er switch O

FF

and remove the plug from

the outlet Åipow

er supply lineÅjbefore

replacing the sewing m

achine needle or bobbin, etc.

–A

lways use original replacem

ent parts for repairs or maintenance.

4. Other safety m

easures–

Keep fingers aw

ay from all m

oving partsÅiespecially near sew

ing machine needle, V

-belt, etc.Åj.

–D

o not drop this control unit or insert any object into any opening.

–D

o not operate without required protective devices.

–If any dam

age is observed on this control unit, if the drive does not run properly or if operator is uncertain

about operation, do not operate the drive unit. Operate the drive only after adjustm

ents, repairs and

approvals have been made by qualified personnel.

–T

he user must avoid m

aking modifications or changes based on user’s judgm

ent.

Observe all safety guidelines if m

odifications or changes must be m

ade.

5. Hazard display, w

arning display(1)

Risks that m

ay cause personal injury or risk to

the machine ate m

arked with this sym

bol in the

instruction manual.

(2)T

his sym

bo

l ind

icate

s ele

ctrical risks a

nd

warnings.

Save these E

ngineer’s Manual for future reference.

Page 8: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 3 -

5.A

lways ground the m

achine.

Th

e 3

-ph

ase

mo

tor h

as a

gro

un

din

g w

ire

(green) (green/yellow). A

lways ground this.

2. PO

INT

S O

F C

AU

TIO

N

1. P

lea

se re

mo

ve yo

ur fo

ot fro

m th

e p

ed

al

when turning the pow

er ON

.

2. Alw

ays turn the power O

FF

when leaving

the machine.

3.D

o n

ot in

spe

ct the

con

trol circu

it with

a

tester.

The sem

iconductor parts may be dam

aged

when the tester’s voltage is applied.

4.A

lways turn the pow

er switch O

FF

before

tilting the sewing m

achine head, replacing

the needle, or threading the needle.

6.D

o not use branched wiring w

hen using the

single-phase motor.

Control circuit

Sew

ingm

achine

Needle

Pow

er

Green/Y

ellow(G

reen)

Page 9: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 4 -

15.If the fuse, remove the cause, and replace the

blown fuse w

ith one having the same capacity.

200 V Tw

o fuses100 V

One fuse

(Front view w

ith cover removed.)

*The above fuses is for protection of the controlbox pow

er supply section.

(View

from back of cover)

*T

he above 8 A fuse is for protection of the

solenoid output power supply (30 V

/24 V)

section.

Wait 10 m

inutes after turning the power

switch O

FF before opening the cover

7.A

high voltage is applied inside the machine,

so wait 10 m

inutes after turning the power sw

itchO

FF before opening the cover.

8.U

se the machine aw

ay from sources of strong

noise such as a high frequency welder.

9.The brakes m

ay not function when the pow

er is turned OFF or w

hen there is a power failure during sew

ingm

achine operation.10.

Match the connector shape and direction, and insert securely.

11.A

n optical method is used for the detector’s detection elem

ent so take care not to let dust or oils get on thedetection plate w

hen removing the cover for adjustm

ent, etc. If these do get on the plate, wipe off w

ith a softcloth and do not scratch the plate. Take care not to let oils enter betw

een the detector discs.12.

When the position detector connector turned O

FF after a set time to prevent dam

age to the motor.

(The motor m

ay not turn OFF if the locking is not com

plete.) After the problem

has been resolved, turn thepow

er OFF and O

N and norm

al operation will be possible. The sam

e operation should be taken when the

detector or wires are broken.

13. Rem

ove the dust that has adhered on them

otor’s dust-proof filter once every two to three

weeks.

14. When connecting the external sw

itch to theoption connector, etc., keep the signal w

ire asshort as possidle. If it is long, m

alfunctions may

occur.

High voltage

danger

a

a

Noise

Dust-proof filter

If the motor is run w

hilethe filter is clogged, them

oto

r ma

y ove

rhe

at

an

d a

ffect th

e m

oto

rlife.

Box

Tw

o 20 A F

uses (XC

-EJK

)T

wo 15 A

Fuses (X

C-E

JKC

E)

8A F

use

¡U

se a shield cable for the signal wire w

henpossible.

Page 10: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 5 -

3. NA

ME

S O

F E

AC

H P

AR

TS

1. Front

2. Rear

3. Left

Co

mm

un

icatio

n co

nn

ecto

r an

dC

ontrol panel connector(B

oth connector can be connectedto each one)

Lever Unit C

onnector displaynam

eplate

Lever connector

En

co

de

rconnector

De

tecto

rconnector

Presser foot

lifter connector

Option A

connector

Option B

connectorSew

ing Machine

connector

Cover

Operation panel

High voltage

warning plate

Motor connector

White connector for 100 V

Brow

n connector for 200 VIncom

ing power

connector

Box

Screw

hole for leverinstallation (M

5 screw)

Page 11: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 6 -

3. Installation of the pulleyS

ecurely tighten the pulley.

Select the correct pulley diam

eter to ensure complete use of the m

otor performance.

Selection of the m

otor pulley :

Motor pulley outer diam

eter (mm

) = x +

5 mm

※T

he motor speed should be set at 3,600 r/m

in. When the m

otor pulley diameter is selected w

ith the

above method and the pulley diam

eter is too small, select the m

inimum

pulley in the range that the

belt will not slip.

※R

efer to page 28 for the pulley diameter to be used w

hen using the Mitsubishi thread trim

ming

sewing m

achine.

4. INS

TA

LLAT

ION

1.Installation of the m

otor

Using the hole opening pattern, open three 9

mm

ho

les o

n th

e ta

ble

. Insta

ll the

mo

tor

securely using the installation bolts, washers,

spring washers and nuts.

Th

e p

atte

rn a

nd

insta

llatio

n b

olts, e

tc., are

included with the m

otor as accessories.

2. Installation of the control box.(1)Install the tw

o enclosed installation plates

on the control box.

(2)Next, tighten the control box onto the m

otor.

(3)Insert the power cord from

the motor into

the connector on the back of the control box.

Insert the encoder cord from the m

otor into

the encoder connector on the front of the

control box.

3-9 cut hole

Table

66159

57

Belt hole

Bobbin

winder

Control box

Pow

er cord from m

otor100 V

: White connector

200 V : B

rown connector

Installationplate

Encoder

cord

(Caution)

Incomplete tightening m

ay

cause malfunctions.

Mo

tor p

ulle

y dia

me

ter

(effective diameter)

Norm

al sewing m

achine speed

※M

otor speed

Select the correct pulley diam

eter.

Page 12: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 7 -

4.M

ounting of the belt.T

o adjust the belt tension, press down on the

center of the belt with your hand, and turn the

upper and lower nuts of the adjustm

ent nut to

increase or decrease the center height of the

motor so that the belt dips approxim

ately 15 mm

.

(Caution)

If the belt tension is too low

, the

medium

and low speeds w

ill be

inconsistent, and the stopping

precision will be poor. W

hen too

tigh

t, the

mo

tor b

ea

ring

s will

deteriorate.

Use the JIS

K6323 sew

ingm

achine belt M-type.

15 mm

(approx. 9.8N)

Adjustm

ent nut

5. Installation of the protective cover(1)Installation of the protective cover (w

ith belt slip off prevention part)

The protective cover is enclosed w

ith the motor as an accessory.

View

from back of protective cover V

iew from

front of protective cover

¡C

hange the direction of the long and short side of the attachment plate according to the m

otor pulley

outer diameter.

(a) For m

otor pulley outer diameter ø

55 to ø80 (b) F

or motor pulley outer diam

eter ø80 to ø

125

¡S

et the center of the washer to the pulley diam

eter indication scale and tighten the butterfly bolt.

¡C

onfirm that the belt does not contact the attachm

ent plate.

Attachm

entplate

Protective cover

installation screw

(View

from back of protective cover)

Attachm

ent platerectangle side

Washer

Butterfly bolt

Attachm

ent platerectangle side

Cross-

sectionA

-A

AA

Pulley outer diam

eterø

55 to ø80 indication

scale (front)P

ulley outer diameter

ø80 to ø

125 indicationscale (front)

(View

from back of protective cover) BB

Cross-

sectionB

-B

Page 13: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 8 -

(2) Installation of the protective rod.

The protective rod is enclosed as a m

otor accessory.

Looking from rear of protective cover Looking from

front of protective cover

¡S

et the protective rod to the motor pulley rotation direction and install betw

een the belt and motor

pulley.

(a) For counterclockw

ise rotation (b) For clockw

ise rotation

¡S

et the center of the protective rod to the position at the center of the belt and motor pulley and

tighten the thumb nut.

¡C

onfirm that the belt and m

otor pulley do not contact the protective rod.

Installationplate

Protective cover

installation screw

(Looking from front of protective cove) (Looking from

front of protective cover)

Protective

rod

Thum

bnut

Washer

Thum

b bolt

Protective

rodB

elt

Motor

pulley

Protectivecover

Protective

rod

Page 14: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 9 -

6. Installation of the position detector

(1)The installation of the position detector w

ill differ

acco

rdin

g to

the

sew

ing

ma

chin

e m

od

el, so

please consult with your sew

ing machine m

odel

dealer for details.

The diagram

on the left shows an exam

ple of

the position detector installation.

(2)Insert the connector from the position detector

into the control box position installation.

(3)To

pre

ven

t ma

lfun

ction

s cau

sed

by sta

tic

electricity, connect the grounding wires (green/

yello

w) fro

m th

e p

ositio

n d

ete

ctor o

nto

the

sewing m

achine head.

7. Connection of the lever unit

(1)Insert connector from the lever unit into the lever

connector of the control box.

(2)When rem

oving a lever unit from the control box

and then setting it independently.

1.A

s for the installation size, refer to the lever

unit installation size of the following figure.

2.R

efer to the way of the follow

ing figure of

insta

lling

a le

ver u

nit a

nd

insta

ll a w

ay o

f

installing.

In installation, always keep the sheet m

etal

between lever unit and the installation board.

Position detector

Grounding w

ire(green/yellow

)

Control box

Control box

Installationboard

Lever unitw

ire

Screw

(Three places)

Lever unit

(Exam

ple) The w

ay of installing a lever unit

The lever unit installation size

(figure which is seen from

A)

M5x3 screw

78

20.566

Sheet

metal

Page 15: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 10 -

8. Connection of the sew

ing machine and control box.

Wire the units as show

n below.

(Caution)

For safety, alw

ays turn the power sw

itch OF

F and w

ait for the panel display [PW

R.O

F]

(displayed for approx. 10 seconds) before connecting or disconnecting the plugs.

This [P

WR

.OF

] display is not an error.

Com

munication connector and C

ontrol panel connector(B

oth connector can be connected to each)

Table hole

Connectorfor lever

Connector

for encoder

Connector for

sewing m

achine

Connector for detector

Page 16: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 11 -

5. WIR

E A

ND

GR

OU

ND

ING

1. Insertion of the power connector

Confirm

the connector from and insertion direction w

hen inserting the power connector into the control

box and insert completely.

3. Pow

er capacity

Use a fuse or com

plete breaker for the power

2. Connection of 3-phase pow

er

Rear control box

Ground the green (green/yellow

) wire

to the grounding terminal. C

onsult with

an electrician for the grounding wires.

Incoming pow

erconnector

Pow

er connector(6-P

ole)Red

White

Black

Green

(green/yellow)

Cord for push-button sw

itch

3-phase power

R-phase S

-phase T-phase

Pow

er

Single phase

100-120 V 550 W

200-240 V 550 W

3-phase

200-240 V 550 W

Recom

mended pow

er capacity

15 A

10 A

Page 17: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 12 -

4.W

hen using the 3-phase 200 V class S

C-380 w

ith Single- phase 200 to 220 V

class

¡C

onnect the “red”and”white”lead w

ires from the push-button sw

itch to the power.

The black w

ire is not used.

Tape it w

ith insulation tape, etc., to insulate securely.

Alw

ays ground the green/yellow (green) grounding w

ire.

5.W

hen using the single phase 100 V S

C-380 w

ith single phase 110 V to 120 V

or

3-phase 200 to 220 V S

C-380 w

ith 3-phase 220 V to 240 V

(1)Rem

ove the cover.

(2)Reconnect the connector from

[CO

N5] to [C

ON

6] (110-120 V/220-240 V

)

(3)After change, alw

ays set the cover of control box.

(4)Change the m

ark “” display on the factory shipm

ent voltage nameplate on the side of the control

box.

Do not connect.

(Securely insulate by taping.)

Control box

Reconnect to here.

Reconnect to here.

Connection connector

to control boxP

ush-button switch

Green/yellow

(Green)C

onnect to groundingterm

inal.

Red

White

Black

Connect these

lea

d w

ires to

the power

Page 18: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 13 -

6. To change solenoid voltage

To change solenoid voltage from

24 V to 30 V

(1)Rem

ove the cover.

(2)Reconnect the connector from

[CO

N11] to [C

ON

12] (30 V)

(3)After change, alw

ays set the cover to the control box.

To change solenoid voltage from

30 V to 24 V

(1)Rem

ove the cover.

(2)Reconnect the connector from

[CO

N12] to [C

ON

11] (24 V)

(3)After change, alw

ays set the cover to the control box.C

over

From

24 V to 30 V

From

30 V to 24 V

Reconnect to here.

Reconnect to here.

Page 19: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 14 -

7. When using the single-phase 220V

servomotor in the 380V

area

Note)

For the single phase 220V

, refer to “[5] 4. When using the three phase 200V

SC

-380 with

single phase 200 to 220V class”.

(1) Connecting the pow

er

1W

hen there is a neutral wire :

2W

hen there is no neutral wire :

Singlephase 220V

is generally used for the residence in the 380V area.

Connect the w

ire from the single phase 220V

power.

(2) Caution

1C

onnect equal number of m

otors to the respective phases, R, S

, and T as show

n in the above

illustration so that the load of 3-phase power is not unbalanced.

2C

hange the voltage in the control box to 220 to 240V.

Refer to “[5] W

ire and Grounding 5. W

hen using the single phase 100V S

C-380 w

ith single phase

110V to 120V

or 3-phase 200 to 220V S

C-380 w

ith 3-phase 220 to 240V”.

3F

or the overseas market, use the m

otor after checking whether the voltage is in the range of

220$$240V since there is a case w

here voltage regulation is high.

4C

onnect the servomotor after checking w

hether or not the wiring in the factory is m

istaken

(especially connecting mistake of the neutral w

ire).

(3) Others

Even the 3-phase 200V

motor (for dom

estic market) can be used in the single phase 200 to 220V

area by changing wiring of the push button section. In addition, it can be used in the 220 to 240V

area by changing the connecting position of the connector as shown in the illustration of the previous

item.

Refer to “[5] W

ire and Grounding 4. W

hen using the 3-phase 200V class S

C-380 w

ith Single-

phase 200 to 220V class”.

Connect the ground w

ire ofm

otor to the neutral wire.

Neutral w

ireR

ST

220V

380V

380V

220V220V

380V1ø

220VM

otor

1ø 220V

Motor

1ø 220V

Motor

Page 20: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 15 -

6. CO

NF

IRM

AT

ION

1. Before turning sw

itches on…..

Reference

Current capacity on page 11.

XC

-EJK

-20-05 (JE : X

C-E

JKC

E20-05) (200 V

type)

XC

-EJK

-10-05 (100 V type)

Installation of control box on page 6.

Installation of lever unit on page 9.

Installation of position detector on page 9.

–––

Mounting of the belt on page 7.

Installation of the pulley on page 6.

–––

Place to confirm

(1)Is the pow

er and capacity suitable?

(2)Is the pow

er voltage the same as the

mark on

the factory preset voltage nameplate on the side of

the control box? (XC

-EM

FY

Control B

ox)

(3)A

re the connectors inserted correctly ?

• Pow

er connector from push-button sw

itch

• Motor connector

• Motor encoder connector

• Lever connector

• Position detection connector

•O

the

r con

ne

ctors (o

ptio

ns, p

resse

r foo

t lifter

control switch panel, etc.)

(4)Is the lead w

ire contacting the V belt ?

(5)Is the belt tension okay ?

(6)A

re the pulley nuts securely tightened ?

(7)C

an the sewing m

achine be rotated lightly by hand

?

PO

WE

R U

NIT

L20E

200-220 V

220-240 V

OU

TP

UT

550 W

PO

WE

R U

NIT

L10E

100-110 V

110-120 V

OU

TP

UT

550 W

Page 21: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 16 -

2. Thrn on the pow

er ……

(1)Does the position detector lam

p light?

(2)Does the LE

D on the control box operation panel light ?

(3)Is the sewing m

achine rotation direction correct ?

•For left rotation (C

CW

)

•For right rotation (C

W)

Refer to page 26 for the procedure fir changing the rotaition.

(4)Is there any heat, odors or abnormal sounds com

ing from the m

otor of control box ?

Operation panel

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Position detector

Operation panel

The sew

ing machine rotation direction is determ

ined with

the rotation direction of this LED

.

The sew

ing machine rotates to the

left looking from the pulley side.

The factory setting is left rotation.

The sew

ing machine rotates to the

right looking from the pulley side.

Turn off the pow

er if there is any heat, odors or abnormal

sounds coming from

the motor or control box.

Contact your dealer im

mediately.

Page 22: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 17 -

7. AD

JUS

TM

EN

TS

1. Adjustm

ent of stopping position

Ad

just th

is po

sition

with

the

de

tecto

r insta

lled

on

to th

e se

win

gm

achine and while stopping at the U

P and D

OW

N positions.

For safety, disconnect the connector for the sew

ing machine.

(1)Adjustm

ent of UP

position•

Loosen the two set screw

s on the detector joint, and set thestop position by rotating by hand.

•If adjustm

ent is not possible by turning the joint, loosen the cross-recessed screw

A show

n in the figure below, and turn all detector

plates simultaneously to adjust to the designated stop position.

(2)Adjustm

ent of DO

WN

position•

The relation of the D

OW

N position and U

P position w

ill differaccording to the m

odel, so adjust this according to the sewing

machine.

•W

hen changing the DO

WN

position , remove the detector cover, and turn only the red detector

plate to adjust to the designated stop position.(T

he cross-recessed screw A

does not need to be loosened at this time.)

•A

lways replace the cover after adjustm

ent.

(Caution)

Refer to the sew

ing machine instruction m

anual when adjusting for use w

ith the.

2. Adjustm

ent of pedal toe down pressure, and heeling pressure

The pedal toe dow

n force can be adjusted by changing the hooking position of spring A to the lever.

(five level is available)T

urn the screw bolt to adjust the spring B

pressure.

(The factory setting of the clearance from

theD

OW

N position to U

P position is approx. 180)

Screw

bolt

Detector joint

Se

win

g m

ach

ine

pulley

Set screw

s(tw

o screws)

DO

WN

positionU

P position

Factory setting

UP

position

180 ˚180˚

DO

WN

position

Speed, U

P position

detector disc(black) (inner)

DO

WN

positiondetector plate(red) (outer)

Screw

A

Spring A

Minlm

um spring

pressureM

edium spring

pressureM

aximum

springpressure

Spring B

Page 23: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 18 -

3. Adjustm

ent of operation speed

Note *

: There is not output of the solenoid, but it is possible to set speed.

(Caution)

No m

atter how large the m

otor pulley diameter is, the speed w

ill not rise higher than

the maxim

um speed H

and the speed set with the [C

]key and [D] key.

Adjustm

ent of each speed

Maxim

speedH

Low speed

L

Thread trim

ming speed

T

Start tack speed

N

End tack speed

V

Slow

start speedS

Operation speed

Reference

Refer to program

mode [P

].

Refer to program

mode [P

].

Refer to program

mode [P

].

Refer to program

mode [P

].

Refer to program

mode [P

].

Refer to program

mode [P

].

The speed can be adjusted from

low to m

aximum

the

[C] key and [D

] key on the operation panel.

Ad

jus

tme

nt

range with the

[C]k

ey

a

nd

[D]key.

Rotation speed

990

Maxim

um speed

Low speed

MA

1-2B

SL

CD It is possible to adjustbetw

een 0 and 99.

[C] key

[D] key

Page 24: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 19 -

8. PE

DA

L OP

ER

AT

ION

(Caution)

Refer to the explanation of [A

] key “ How

to use normal m

ode” page 27 for details on

setting the 1 position and 2 position.

Pedal operation

Neutral—

Toe dow

n

Toe dow

n—N

eutral

Neutral—

Light heeling

Neutral—

Full heeling

Operation

The sew

ing machine w

ill rotate at a speed that is relevant

to the toe down am

unt.

1 position setting

Needle U

P position stop

2 position setting

Needle D

OW

N position stop

Presser foot lifter operation

1 position setting

Operation of needle U

P position stop.

2 position setting

Needle U

P position w

ith half-rotation.

Page 25: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 20 -

9. OP

ER

AT

ION

OF

TH

E O

PE

RA

TIO

N P

AN

EL K

EY

S

1) Displays during norm

al mode and functions of each key

When the pow

er supply switch is turned O

N, the rotation direction w

ill display on the LED

.M show

n below.

When the rotation direction isn’t displayed on LE

D.M

, press the [↓] key anytim

e.

This state is called the norm

al mode, and the follow

ing keys can be operated.

2) Selection of each m

odeT

he modes can be changed from

the normal m

ode to various program m

odes and various basic functions

and application functions set with this operation panel.

(For each m

ode function, refer to a table of program m

ode function.)

(1) Program

mode and m

odel

Note)

This above keys can be operated only w

hen the rotary display is shown on the LE

D.M

.

LED

.MT

he rotation direction of thesew

ing machine is displayed.

The rotation direction can be

cha

ng

ed

with

the

[↓

] + [M

]keys

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

[↑] U

p keyT

he validity of start and endtacking stitch and num

ber ofstitches can be set.A

nd

the

valid

ity an

d N

o. o

fstitches of preset stitching canbe set.

[↓] D

own key, [M

] keyB

y operating these two keys

simultaneously, the rotation

dire

ction

of th

e se

win

gm

achine can be changed.T

he

disp

lay is sh

ow

n o

nLE

D.M

.

[A] key

1 position and 2 position can beselected for the needle positionduring stopping.

[B] key

Th

is is

us

ed

to s

tart

sewing w

ith a slow start.

After the pow

er is turnedO

N

an

d

afte

r th

rea

dtrim

ming, the sew

ing will

start with a slow

start.

[C] key, [D

] keyT

he

s

pe

ed

a

tw

hich the pedalis

fu

lly

toe

ddow

n is set.

LED

.A-D

The state of the [A

] to [D] keys

function setting is shown.

Model

Model nam

e

Program

mode [F

]

Program

mode [G

]

Program

mode [H

]

Program

mode [J]

Program

mode [Q

]

Program

mode [R

]

Program

mode [S

]

Program

mode [1]

Program

mode [2]

Model

Model nam

e

Norm

al mode

Tacking setting m

ode

No.of tacking stitches setting m

ode

Preset stitching setting m

ode

Pattern N

o. selection mode

P

rogram m

ode [P]

Program

mode [A

]

Program

mode [B

]

Program

mode [C

]

Program

mode [D

]

Program

mode [E

]

SC

-380S

C-380

Page 26: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 21 -

(3)Types of program

mode

Program

mode [P

] The setting to often use 1 *S

ewing m

achine,

etc.

Program

mode [A

] The setting to often use 2 *S

ervo motor,etc.

Program

mode [B

] The setting to often use 3 *C

ounter/Speed

display, etc.

Program

mode [C

] In/Out definition m

ode

(setting in/output signal to function,etc)

Program

mode [D

] Tacking setting m

ode

Program

mode [E

] H/W

checking mode/R

ecorder of running.

Program

mode [F

] Cutter setting m

ode

Program

mode [G

]Thread trim

ming tim

ing setting mode

Program

mode [H

] Setting speed lim

it setting mode

Program

mode [J] P

anel switch cancel m

ode

Program

mode [Q

] Unusual speed setting m

ode

Program

mode [R

] Reset/returning to original data.

(Return to factory setting)

Program

mode [S

] Sim

ple sequence mode

Program

mode [1] S

imple setting m

ode for Mitsubishi thread

trimm

ing sewing m

achine.

Program

mode [2] S

imple setting m

ode for chain stitch sewing

machine.

Ta

cking

(con

de

nse

d stitch

) mo

de

, pre

set stitch

ing

settin

g m

od

e,

pattern select mode.

Norm

al mode

(The rotation direction is

displayed on LED

.M)

(Caution)

A different program

mode cannot be entered from

the program m

ode. To change the

program m

ode, always return to the norm

al mode first.

Page 27: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 22 -

(3)Selection of each program

mode from

the normal m

ode.

Mode m

ane

Tacking type setting

mode

No. of tacking stitch

setting mode

Preset stitching setting

mode

Pattern N

o. selectionm

ode

Program

mode [P

]

Program

mode [A

]

Program

mode [B

]

Program

mode [C

]

Program

mode [D

]

Program

mode [E

]

Program

mode [F]

Program

mode [G

]

Key operation

Press the

key one time

from the norm

al mode.

Press the

key two tim

esform

the normal m

ode.

Press the

key three times

form the norm

al mode.

Press the

key four times

form the norm

al mode.

While holding dow

n the key, press the

key for 2seconds or m

ore from norm

alm

ode.W

hile holding down the

key, press the A

1-2 key for 2

seconds or more from

normal

mode.

While holding dow

n the key, press the

B

SL

key for 2seconds or m

ore from norm

alm

ode.W

hile holding down the

key, press the C

key for 2seconds or m

ore from norm

alm

ode.W

hile holding down the

key, press the D

key for 2seconds or m

ore from norm

alm

ode.W

hile holding down the

key, press the A

1-2 key and

the key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.W

hile holding down the

key, press the B

SL

key andthe

key for 2 seconds orm

ore from norm

al mode.

While holding dow

n the key, press the

C

key andthe

key for 2 seconds orm

ore from norm

al mode.

Digital display

*T

he tacking setting mode w

illbe entered.

Note)

Skipping about this m

enu at the time of pattern N

o.= 4.

* The tacking stitches setting

mode w

ill be entered.

* The tacking stitches setting

mode w

ill be entered.N

ote)S

kipping about this menu at the tim

e of pattern A to

H.

*The pattern N

o. selection mode

will be entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program

mode [P

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program

mode [A

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program

mode [B

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program m

ode [C] w

ill beentered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program m

ode [D] w

ill beentered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program

mode [E

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program

mode [F

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.*

The program m

ode [G] w

ill beentered.

Return to the

normal m

odeP

ress

key

any time.

Pre

ss ke

yany tim

e.

Pre

ss ke

yany tim

e.

Pre

ss ke

yany tim

e.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

gd

ow

n

key,

press key.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 28: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 23 -

Mode m

ane

Program

mode [H

]

Program

mode [J]

Program

mode [Q

]

Program

mode [R

]

Program

mode [S

]

Program

mode [1]

Program

mode [2]

Key operation

While holding dow

n the

key, press the D

key and

the key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the key and the

A

1-2 key and the

B

SL

key for

2 se

con

ds o

r mo

re fro

m

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the A

1-2 key and

the C

key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the B

SL

key and

the C

key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the B

SL

key and

the D

key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the A

1-2 key and

the B

SL

key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

While holding dow

n the

key, press the C

key and

the D

key for 2 seconds or

more from

normal m

ode.

Digital display

*The display w

ill flicker.

*The program

mode [H

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*T

he program m

ode [J] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*The program

mode [Q

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*The program

mode [R

] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*T

he program m

ode [S] w

ill be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*T

he program m

ode [1] will be

entered.

*The display w

ill flicker.

*T

he program m

ode [2] will be

entered.

Return to the

normal m

ode

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

g

do

wn

ke

y,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

g

do

wn

ke

y,

press key.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

g

do

wn

ke

y,

press key.

Pre

ss D

key

for 2 seconds or

more.

Wh

ile

ho

ldin

g

do

wn

ke

y,

press key.

Pre

ss D

key

for 2 seconds or

more. (*1)

Pre

ss D

key

for 2 seconds or

more. (*1)

Note (*1) :

It is set by pressing [D] key for over tw

o seconds.

It is possible to return to normal m

ode by holding down [

↑], [↓

] key, but in this case

it is not set to new setting.

Page 29: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 24 -

3) HO

W T

O U

SE

PR

OG

RA

M M

OD

ES

[1] AN

D [2]

(1)PR

OG

RA

M M

OD

E [1]

(SE

WIN

G M

AC

HIN

E H

EA

D F

OR

LEA

TH

ER

AN

D H

EA

VY

-WE

IGH

T M

AT

ER

IALS

)

To set the functions for the sew

ing machine w

ith thread trimm

er for leather and heavy-weight m

aterials.(ex.T

o set for the DN

U-241H

)...............................................................................Function setting [D

NU

4]

1 E

nter program m

ode [1] ([↓] +

[A] +

[B])

2*

Program

mode [1] w

ill be entered.

3*

Set function to [D

NU

4].

4*

[DN

U4] w

ill flicker when [D

] key is pressed.

5*

Press [D

] key (2 seconds or mode) to return to the

normal m

ode.

(2) TH

E P

RO

GR

AM

MO

DE

[2] (CH

AIN

ST

ITC

H S

EW

ING

MA

CH

INE

HE

AD

)

To set the functions for the chainstitch sew

ing machine head

1 E

nter program m

ode [2] ([↓] +

[C] +

[D])

2*

Program

mode [2] w

ill be entered.

3*

Set function to [3700]

4*

[3700] will flicker w

hen [D] key is pressed.

5*

Press [D

] key (2 seconds or more) to return to the

normal m

ode.

Description

A.

Select the function nam

e that corresponds to the sewing m

achine model from

“Table of simplified setting value for

JUK

I sewing m

achine with thread trim

mer” described in the next page. P

ress [D] key for 2 seconds or m

ore, andthe num

ber of revolution of the function name and connector function setting can be autom

atically set.B

.T

o return to the normal m

ode from the [dU

] display, press the [↓] key w

hile holding down [↑

] key. Inthe case, [dU

] will not be set, and the last settings w

ill be used.C

.E

ach time the [↓

] key is pressed in step 3, the function w

ill change in order from [dU

] [dnU4] [LZ

H]

[dSU

] …[U

639]. (The factory setting is [LU

2v].)

(Note)

In case of SC

-380, when this setting function is perform

ed, all contents which have been set

so far are cleared and the number of revolution and function w

hich correspond to the selectedsew

ing machine m

odel can be set automatically.

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

Page 30: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 25 -

Program

mode [1] (M

achine head for leather and heavy-weight m

aterials)

Note1.

Rotating

direction

Function

name

7 segment display

Sew

ing machine

model

High speed

(H)

Low speed

(L)

Thread trimm

ing

speed (T)

Start tacking

speed (N)

End tacking

speed (V)

Slow

start

speed (S)

Slow start number

of stitches (SLN)

Connector

function setting

dUD

U-141H

2000200

200600

600200

1C

CW

A

dnU4

DH

U-241H

2400200

170820

820200

0C

CW

A

LZHLZH

-12902000

185185

490490

1901

CC

WA

dSU

DS

U-14*

2000170

1701270

1270170

1C

CW

A

dSC

DS

C-24*

2200185

185570

570190

1C

CW

A

PLW

4P

LW-124

*2500

180180

570570

1801

CC

WA

PLW

6P

LW-126

*2500

180180

570570

1801

CC

WA

PLC

PLC

-16602000

170170

12001200

1701

CC

WA

PLC

-1610

LU2v

LU-22*

0 (VR type)

3500170

1701200

1200170

0C

CW

B

LU2s

LU-22*

0 (SW type)

3500170

1701200

1200170

0C

CW

C

LU2L

LU-2216

3000170

1701200

1200170

0C

CW

B

LU51

LU-1510

3000170

170600

600170

1C

CW

D

LU56

LU-1560

2500170

170600

600170

1C

CW

D

LU11

LU-1114

2500170

170600

600170

1C

CW

A

LS34

LS-341N

2000170

1701200

1200170

1C

CW

A

U639

639004000

250180

––

2503

CC

WN

Note)

1.E

ach time the [

↓] key is pressed, a function nam

e is displayed in order to the direction of ↓

.

2.E

ach time the [

↑] key is pressed, a function nam

e is displayed in order to the direction of ↑

.

(Caution)

Be sure to select the function nam

e corresponding to the machine head used. If the selection is m

istaken, damage to th

e machine head, control box

or motor m

ay result. (How

ever, the actual number of rotations is lim

ited by the machine head used.)

Note2.

Table of sim

plified setting value for JUK

I sewing m

achine with thread trim

mer

Page 31: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 26 -

Program

mode [2] (C

hainstitch machine head)

Note1.

Rotating

direction

Function

name

7 segment display

Sew

ing machine

model

High speed

(H)

Low speed

(L)

Thread trimm

ing

speed (T)

Start tacking

speed (N)

End tacking

speed (V)

Slow

start

speed (S)

Slow start number

of stitches (SLN)

Connector

function setting

3600M

O-3600/Z18

6000

250250

--

2500

CW

E

3700M

O-3700/Z18

7000

250250

--

2500

CW

E

3914M

O-3914/Z18

8000

250250

--

2500

CW

E

3904M

O-3904/Z18

8500

250250

--

2500

CW

E

3900M

OR

-3900/Z18

7000250

250-

-250

0C

WE

MO

65S

Y-34

6500250

250-

-250

0C

WF

MO

70S

Y-33

7000250

250-

-250

0C

WF

MO

75S

Y-32

7500250

250-

-250

0C

WF

MO

80S

Y-31

8000250

250-

-250

0C

WF

MO

85S

Y-30

8500250

250-

-250

0C

WF

AH

1M

FC-7000/A

H1

5000250

250-

-250

0C

WG

MF

MF-7000

5000250

250-

-250

0C

CW

H

AX

M1

MH

-481, 4825500

200200

--

2000

CC

WI

AX

M2

MH

-486, 4884500

200200

--

2000

CC

WI

U345

345004000

200200

--

10005

CW

M

U347

347004000

200200

--

10005

CW

K

U348

348005500

200200

--

10005

CW

L

U160

1601000

250200

--

2502

CW

I

U16

16800

250200

--

2502

CW

O

Note)

1.E

ach time the [

↓] key is pressed, a function nam

e is displayed in order to the direction of ↓

.

2.E

ach time the [

↑] key is pressed, a function nam

e is displayed in order to the direction of ↑

.

(Caution)

Be sure to select the function nam

e corresponding to the machine head used. If the selection is m

istaken, damage to th

e machine head, control box

or motor m

ay result. (How

ever, the actual number of rotations is lim

ited by the machine head used.)

Note2.

Page 32: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 27 -

4) How

to use the normal m

ode

Speed adjustm

ent

By operating this [C

] key, the speed which

is become late.

By operating this [D

] key, the speed when

the pedal is fully toed down is risen.

The rate w

ith speed is 2 digits of LED

.C,

LED

.D, and is displayed and can be set in

0-99.

Change 1 position / 2 position

By operating this [A

] key, 1 position / 2

position can be selected for the needle

position during stopping.

1 position or 2 position is displayed on

LED

.A.

At the tim

e of 1 position, the needle is

stopped at Up position.

At the tim

e of 2 position, the needle is

stopped at Dow

n position.

Afte

r thre

ad

trimm

ing

, the

ne

ed

le is

stopped at up position.

is Up position

is Dow

n position

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Slow

start ON

/OF

F

By operating this [B

] key, slow start

ON

/OF

F can be selected.

Turned O

N w

hen wanting to sew

the

beginning of the sewing in slow

start.

After the pow

er is turned ON

or after

thread trimm

ing, the sewing w

ill start

with a slow

start.

Slow

start ON

/OF

F is displayed on

LED

.B.

is OF

F

is ON

Change m

otor rotation direction

By operating these tw

o keys ([↓

] +

[M]) sim

ulta

ne

ou

sly,the

rota

tion

direction of the sewing m

achine can

be changed.

As fo

r the

rota

tion

dire

ction

, the

direction which w

as seen from the

motor axis is displayed in LE

D.M

.

CC

W : C

ounterclockwise rotation

CW

: Clockw

ise rotation

Page 33: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 28 -

5) Display and function of each key in the tacking m

ode and pattern mode. (for lock

stitch machine)

(1) Tacking setting m

ode (At the tim

e of patter No.=4, this m

ode will be skipped.)

When the [↑

] key is turned ON

, w

ill display above the [M] key, and the tacking setting m

ode will be

entered. The validity and type of start and tacking can be set here.

Norm

alm

ode

Tacking m

ode settingm

ode*

Setting of the start

tacking validity andtype

*S

etting of the endtacking validity andtype

Tacking m

ode

No.of

tackingstitchsettingm

ode

PatternN

o.setting

Pre

set stitch

ing

setting mode

*S

etting of thepressetstitchingvalidityand N

o. ofstitches

[↑] key

ON

[↑] key

ON

[↑] key

ON

[↑] key

ON

[↓] key

ON

[↓] key

ON

[↓] key

ON

[↓] key

ON

Note)

At the tim

e of pattern No.=4 (continuous tack), the tacking setting w

ill be skipped.A

t the time of pattern N

o.=A to H

(program stitching), the stitching m

ode will be skipped.

In case of XC

-EN

, there is no backstitch output.[↑

] key ON

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Factory setting

Setting of start tacking validity

<Display ex.>

: Valid

: Invalid

Setting of end tacking type

<Display ex.>

: No tacking

: V tacking

(Once tacking)

: N tacking

(Double tacking)

: M tacking

(Triple tacking)

: W tacking

(4 repeat tacking)

: 5 repeat tacking

: 6 repeat tacking

Setting of start tacking type

<Display ex.>

: No tacking

: V tacking

(Once tacking)

: N tacking

(Double tacking)

: M tacking

(Triple tacking)

: W tacking

(4 repeat tacking)

: 5 repeat tacking

: 6 repeat tacking

Setting of end tacking validity

<Display ex.>

: Valid

: Invalid

Page 34: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 29 -

(2) No. of tacking stitches setting m

ode.

When the [↑

] key is turned ON

again, w

ill display above the [M] key indicator, and the N

o. of stitches

can be set.

1)T

he time except pattern N

o.4

2)W

hen the pattern No.4

Each setting value can be changed from

0 to 9 stitches,A,B

,C,D

,E,F

stitches

A is 10 stitches

B is 11 stitches

C is 12 stitches

D is 13 stitches

E is 14 stitches

F is 15 stitches

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Note.

Re

fer to

the

“Ta

ble

of

digital display” for thecorrespondence of thed

igita

l d

isp

lay

a

nd

alphanumerals.

No. of stitchesA

setting.

Factory setting

No. of stitchesB

setting.

No. of stitchesD

setting.

No. of stitchesC

setting.

Start

End

AB

CD

A

BC

D

Page 35: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 30 -

(3) Preset stitching setting m

ode

1) When the pattern is the tim

e except pattern No.4

In the No.of tim

es (N) setting is N

=3, the stitching will be in

the order or A, B

and C. If the setting is N

=5 , the stitchingw

ill be in the order of A,B

,C,D

,C. If the N

is 6 or more, the

order will be A

,B,C

,D,C

,D…

… (If N

=0, tacking will continue in

the order AB

CD

CD

……

while the pedal is pressed dow

n.)

2) When the pattern is N

o.4

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Factory setting

Setting of preset stitching

<Display ex.>

: Valid

: Invalid

Setting of N

o.stitches N

(0 to 9999 stitches)

Start tacking that w

as in the tacking mode w

ill start at the S position.

End tacking that w

as in the tacking mode w

ill end at the E position.

Start tacking

End tacking

SE

N

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Factory setting

Setting of continuous tack

stitching validity

<Display ex.>

: Valid

: Invalid

Setting of N

o. times N

(0 to 9999 stitches)

A

BC

D

N

Page 36: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 31 -

10.H

OW

TO

US

E T

HE

PR

OG

RA

M M

OD

E (E

XA

MP

LE

OF

MO

ST

FR

EQ

UE

NT

LY U

SIN

G)

No.1

To change the m

aximum

speed (EX

. To change to 4500 rotations)…

…F

unction setting [H.4500]

(1) Enter program

mode [P

] ([↓] +

[↑])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set to [4]

(4)(5)

* Set to [5]

* Set to [0]

(6)(7)

* Set to [0]

* Com

plete the [H] function setting

(8) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

The setting range of the m

aximum

speed is 0 to 8999 rotations.

B.

By pressing each of the [A

],[B],[C

] and [D] keys, the setting value w

ill change between 0 to 9.

(How

ever, the [A] key is only betw

een 0 to 8.)

C.

The factory setting is [200 rotations].

D.

Low speed,thread trim

ming speed, start tacking speed, end tacking speed, m

edium speed and slow

start speed can be set in the same m

anner.

No.2 T

o change the number of stitches in slow

start (EX

. to change three ……

Function setting [S

LN.3])

(1) Enter program

mode [P

] ([↓] +

[↑])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set function to [S

LN]

(4)(5)

* Set to [3]

* Com

plete the [SLN

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

This is valid w

hen the [B] key in the norm

al mode is turned O

N.

B.

The setting range of the num

ber of stitches is 1 to 5 stitches.

C.

By pressing [D

] key, the setting value will change betw

een 1 to 5 stitches.

D.

The factory setting is [2 stitches].

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 37: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 32 -

No.3 T

o apply a weak break during stopping …

…function setting[B

K.O

N]

(1) Enter program

mode [A

] ([↓] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [A

] will be entered.

* Set function to [B

K]

(4)(5)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [BK

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

This is used for high speed operation during standing operations.

To turned O

N, it operates at the speed w

ith the rate which w

as set with the [C

] and the [D] key in norm

al

mode regardless of the pedal stepping quantity.

B.

This setting is first priority to the key sw

itch [AU

TO

] of operation panel.

C.

The setting value w

ill alternate between [O

F] and [O

N] w

ith each press of the [D] key in step (3).

(factory setting is [OF

])

No.4 T

o set the standing work type…

…function setting[V

CS

.ON

]

(1) Enter program

mode [ Q

] ([↓]+

[ A ] +

[ C ])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [Q

] will be entered.

* Set to [O

N]

(4)

* Com

plete the [VC

S.O

N] function setting

(5) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Use this w

hen the sewing m

achine needle is completely dow

n when stopped.

To set O

N, m

otor is applied a weak brake during stopping.

B.

The setting value w

ill alternate between [O

F] and [O

N] w

ith each press of [D] key in step (4).

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 38: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 33 -

No.5 T

o change input/output port function.

(1) To operate one stitch operation w

ith a external switch…

…function setting[IC

.S01]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IC

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [S

01] * C

omplete the [IC

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A. T

his is used to increase the penetration strength of the first stitch when the fabric is thick.

Each tim

e the switch [B

CR

] connected to the No.6 pin in the option A

connectoris turned O

N, the (forw

ard) - (reverse) operation will be repeated, and the

needle will stop right w

ith forward operation, above the fabric. H

owever, w

henth

e o

pe

ratio

n sig

na

l is turn

ed

ON

an

d th

e n

ee

dle

is stop

pe

d th

e se

win

gm

achine will operate forw

ard after reversing once.W

hen stopped with reverse operation, forw

ard operation will start from

thatposition.*

The needle position stop angle is set w

ith the needleposition stop angle [C

8] in the program m

ode[P]

B.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed in step (4), the set value

will be changed. (factory setting is [S

0])

Note)

When using this function, alw

ays return to thenorm

al mode before starting operations.

(2)T

o confirm the position w

here the needle passed through the fabricated to raise the penetration

strength of the first stitch with the external sw

itch. ……

function setting[IC.B

CR

]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IC

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [B

CR

] * C

omplete the [IC

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Using the external sw

itch connected No.6 pin in the option A

connector, onestitch operation w

ill be operated.B

.T

he setting value will be changed w

ith each press of the [D] key in step (4).

(factory setting is [S0])

Note)

When using this function, alw

ays return to the normal m

ode beforestarting operations.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

OptionA

0VS

1

(IC)

123

456

OptionA

0VB

CR

(IC)

123

456

reverseforw

ard

Page 39: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 34 -

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

(3) To em

ergency stop during sewing m

achine operation ……

function setting[IA.E

S]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IA

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [E

S]

* Com

plete the [IA] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Turning O

N the external sw

itch connected No.5 pin in sew

ing machine connector, backtacking output

will be operate w

hen sewing m

achine is stopped.

When beginning to sew

by backstitching,the operation becomes sm

ooth.

B.

The setting value w

ill be changed with each press of [D

] key in step (4).

(factory setting is [S7])

Note)

When using this function, alw

ays return to the normal m

ode before starting operations.

(4) To operate backstitching signal during sew

ing machine is stopped. …

…function setting [IE

.BS

L]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IE

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [B

SL]

* Com

plete the [IE] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

The sw

itch connected No.2 pin in the option A

connector is emergency stop signal.

B.

The setting value w

ill be changed with each press of the [D

] key in step (4).

(factory setting is [PS

U])

C.

Setting function [ID

.ES

], It becomes the function of em

ergency stop signal too.

(Connect the external sw

itch No.5-N

o.6 pin in the sewing m

achine connector.)

Note)

When using this function, alw

ays return to the normal m

ode before starting operations.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

123

456

Option A

0VE

S

(IA)

Sew

ing machine

BS

L0V

7654321

!4

!3

!2

!1

!0

98

Page 40: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 35 -

(5) To output a needle cooler output to spare output S

OL1 …

…function setting [O

1.NC

L]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [O

I]

(4)(5)

* Set to [N

CL]

* Com

plete the [OI] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Select the puller output [P

UL] from

the setting table on page 131.B

.S

pare output solenoid [SO

L2] will be turned on, w

hile presser foot lifter is operated.

(6)T

o output a puller output to spare output SO

L2 ……

function setting[O2.P

UL] + [O

2C.O

N] (T

o set 50

% duty)

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [O

2]

(4)(5)

* Set to [P

UL]

* Com

plete the [O2] function setting

(6)(7)

* Set function to [O

2C]

*Set to [O

N]

(8)(9) R

eturn to the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

*Com

plete the [O2] founction setting

Description

A.

Select the needle cooler output [N

CL] from

the setting table on page 130.S

elect the setting to connect [OI] and [N

CL].

B.

Spare output [S

OL1] w

ill be turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is

running (including needle lifting).

SO

L1

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

369

258

147

1211

10

1514

13

Option B

369

258

147

1211

10

1514

13

SO

L2O

ption B

Page 41: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 36 -

(7) To operate spare output SO

L2 only during sewing m

achine operation using the spare input switch IN

1.

..........function setting [I1.IR1] + [O

2. OT

1]

(1) Enter program

mode [C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IR

1]

(4)(5)

* Set to [I1]

* Com

plete the [O2] function setting

(6)(7)

* Set to [O

T1]

* Com

plete the [O2] function setting

(8) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Select the set value[IR

1],[IR2] or [IR

3] from the setting table on page 128

When [IR

1] is selected,[I1] and [IR1] are connected, and [O

2] and [OT

1] are connected.W

hen [IR2] is selected,[I1] and [IR

2] are connected, and [O2] and [O

T2] are connected.

When [IR

3] is selected,[I1] and [IR3] are connected, and [O

2] and [OT

3] are connected.T

he example is w

hen [IR1] is selected.

B.

The option B

connector spare input switch IN

1 and spare output SO

L2 are connected in the following

manner.

C.

The follow

ing setting will appear w

hen [IR2] is selected.

(4)’(7)’

*Connect [I1] to [IR

2] * C

onnect [O2] to [O

T2]

D. T

he following setting w

ill appear when [IR

3] is selected.

(4)”(7)”

* Connect[I1] to [IR

3] * C

onnect [O2] to [O

T3]

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

0 V

IN1

(IR1)

OU

T2 (S

OL2)

+30

OptionB

369

258

147

1211

10

1514

13

Option B

IN1

Spare

input 1

0 VS

OL2

Setting in step (4)

Digital display

I1I2

IO1

IR1

IR2

IR3

OT

1O

T2

OT

3 Setting in step (7)

O1

O2

O3

Option B

Spare

output2

30 V

Page 42: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 37 -

No.6 T

o set external one shot signal ……

function setting C m

ode [IC.S

H] + P

mode [S

HM

.SH

]

(1) Enter program

mode[C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IC

]

(4)(5)

*Set to [S

H]

* Com

plete the [IC] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(7) Enter program

mode [P

] ([↓] +

[↑])

(8)(9)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set function to [S

HM

]

(10)(11)

* Set to [S

H]

* Com

plete the [SH

M] function setting

(12) Return the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Description

A.

Set both C

mode [IC

] and P m

ode [SH

M] function.

B.

When external one shot signal [S

H] (connected N

o.6 pin in option connector A) is turned O

N.autom

atic

sewing is operated. A

nd when [S

H] signal is turned O

FF

, manual sew

ing can be operated.

*W

hen one shot signal ON

and then either of external operation signals (S0,S

1,S4) is turned O

N, the

sewing m

achine will be operate at each order speed. A

nd external operation signal is turned OF

F,

sewing m

achine will be operate at the speed set by [C

],[D] key.

(When [P

] mode [A

T]=

ON

or control panel key is ON

,operation can be stopped by PS

U,P

SD

or ES

signals.)

C.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed in step (4), the set value w

ill be changed.

D.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed in step (10), the set value w

ill be changed. (factory setting is [SH

])

* Set[S

S] setting,the operation w

ill be become sam

e as No.13.

Note) W

hen using this function, always return to the norm

al mode before starting operations.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

SH

123

456

Option A0 V

Page 43: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 38 -

No.7

To set number of stitches to the needle U

P position stop after detecting the fabric end w

ith an optical

sensor, etc. (Ex. to set to 10 stitches)…

…function setting C

mode [IA

.PS

U] + P

mode [P

SU

.10]

(1) Enter program

mode[C

] ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will be entered.

* Set function to [IA

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [P

SU

] * C

omplete the [IA

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(7) Enter program

mode [P

] ([↓] +

[↑])

(8)(9)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set function to [P

SU

]

(10)(11)

* Set to [1]

* Set to [0]

(12)(13) R

eturn the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

* Com

plete the [PS

U] function setting

Description

A.

Set both C

mode [IA

] and P m

ode [PS

U] function.

B.

Connect photoelectric sensor to N

o.2 pin in option A connector,

and photoelectric sensor is turned ON

, the needle will stop at

the UP

position after 10 stitches and then the thread will be

trimm

ed.

C.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed in step (4), the set value w

ill be

changed.(factory setting is [PS

U])

D.

The setting range of the num

ber of stitches in 0 to 99 stitches.

E.

Each tim

e the [C] key in step (10) or [D

] key in step (11) is pressed, the set value will change betw

een 0 to 9.

F.

Set function [IB

.PS

U] +

[PS

U.10], it is possible to set num

ber of stitches after detecting the fabric end

with an optical sensor. (C

onnect optical sensor output to No.4 pin in option connector A

.)

(* for example, use the optical sensor in O

MR

ON

E3V

3-D62)

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Sensor detection point

Setting of N

o.of stitches

Needle stop

123

456

Signal w

rite0 V

Pow

ersupply+12V

Optical

sensor

Option A

Page 44: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 39 -

No.8

To continue presser foot lifting after the thread trim

ming, and to bring dow

n the presser foot after

the time set on the tim

er has passed. ……

function setting [FU

M.O

N] + [F

U.C

]

(1) Enter program

mode [P

] ([↓] +

[↑])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set function to [F

UM

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [FU

M] function setting

(6)(7)

* Press [↓

] key and set function [FU

] * S

et to [C]

(8)(9) R

eturn to the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

* Com

plete the [FU

] function setting

Description

A.

The m

otor is reverse run after thread trimm

ing, and the needle will stop near the needle bar top dead

point.T

he reverse run angle can be set in [R8] and the setting range is 0 to 360, and it is 2-degree interval.

B.

The setting value w

ill alternate between [O

F] and [O

N] w

ith each press of [D] key in (4). (factory setting

is [OF

])

No.9 T

o set needle position higher than usual after thread trimm

ing ……

function setting [RU

.ON

]

(1) Enter program

mode [P

] (↓] +

[↑])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [P

] will be entered.

* Set function to [R

U]

(4)(5)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [RU

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A. S

et both [FU

M] and [F

U] functions.

B. E

ach time of the [D

] key is pressed in step (4), the se value will alternate betw

een [OF

] and [ON

]. (factorysetting is [O

F])

C. E

ach time the [D

] key is pressed in step (7), the set value will change in order of [M

][C][A

][T]. (factory

setting is [M])

D. T

he timer tim

e can be adjusted with the F

UM

timer setting[F

CT

] in the [C] m

ode. (factory setting is 12 sec)

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 45: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 40 -

No.10

To adjust the correlation betw

een toe down angle speed. (E

X. to set value 55 to sew

quickly at a

high speed)……

function setting [PD

C.55]

(1) Enter program

mode [A

] ([↓] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [A

] will be entered.

* Set function to [P

DC

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [5]

* Set to [5]

(6)(7) R

eturn to the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

* Com

plete the [PD

C] function setting

Description

A.

Only variable-speed operation w

ill be possible. Set position stopping and thread trim

ming w

ill not be

possible.

B.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed, the setting w

ill alternate between [O

F] and [O

N]

No.11 T

o run without the detector (w

hen the detector is broken). ……

function setting[NO

S.O

N]

(1) Enter program

mode [A

] ([↓] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [A

] will be entered.

* Set function to [N

OS

]

(4)(5)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [NO

S] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Th

e cu

rve a

mo

un

t of th

e sp

ee

d ch

an

ge

for th

eam

ount that.T

he curve amount of the speed change for the size

of the set value can be set. The pedal is pressed

can be set. To sew

quickly at a high speed, increasethe set value. T

o finely adjust the medium

speedregion, decrease the setting.

B.

The setting range is 10 to 99. (factory setting is [30])

C.

Each tim

e the [C] key in step (4) or [D

] key in step(5) is pressed, the set value w

ill change between 0

to 9. (How

ever, the [C] key is betw

een 1 to 9)

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Speed

Set value-Large

Factory setting [30]

Set value-S

mall

Pedal toe dow

n

Page 46: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 41 -

No.12 T

o adjust tacking accurately(1) T

o adjust tacking surely ……

[D1.C

ST

] + [CT

.10] (T

o set the stop time at each tacking corner to 100 m

illiseconds)

(1) Enter program

mode [D

] ([↓] +

[D])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [D

] will be entered.

* Set function to [C

ST

]

(4)(5)

* Com

plete the [D1] function setting

* Set function to [C

T]

(6)(7)

* Set to [I0]

* Com

plete the [CT

] function setting

(8) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Set function [B

M] to [O

N] w

hen start/end tacking speed is less than 1000 rpmB

.S

et function [BM

] to [OF

] when start/end tacking speed is 1000 rpm

or higher.T

his BM

function can be used for a rough tacking alignment of the start and end tacking.

C.

Each tim

e the [D] key is pressed, the setting w

ill alternate between [O

F] and [O

N]. (T

he factory settingis [O

F].)

Note)

This function can be used w

hen a stop is not made at each corner w

hen tacking.W

hen the function setting [D1.C

ST

] is set, this function setting [BM

.ON

] will be invalidated.

(2) To align tacking w

hen start/end tacking speed is less than 1000 rpm. …

…function setting [B

M.O

N]

(1) Enter program

mode [D

] ([↓] +

[ D ])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [D

] will entered.

* Set function to [B

M]

(4)(5)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [BM

] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

Set the type of start/end tacking and the no.of stitches before m

aking the above setting.B

.F

or example, to carry out W

tacking, the unit will stop at each corner for 100 m

illiseconds.

C. E

ach time the [D

] key is pressed in step (3), the setting will change in the order of [M

], [D], [C

ST

], [CS

U]

and [CS

D]. (factory setting is [M

])D

. The setting range of the stop tim

e is 0 to 990 milliseconds in 10-m

illisecond intervals.E

. Each tim

e the [C] key is pressed in the step (6), the set value w

ill change from 0 to 9, and each tim

e the[D

] key is pressed, will change from

0 to 9.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Start

End

Stop

Stop

Stop

Page 47: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 42 -

D.

Set to the tack alignm

entW

hen “BM

” is OF

F, the tim

ing of backstitch solenoid turning ON

is one stitch before the setting number

stitches. (as shown below

.)W

hen “BM

” is ON

, the timing of backstitch solenoid turning O

N is the setting num

ber stitches.

(3) To set the no. of stitch com

pensation for start tacking alignment B

T1

(To correct the no. of advance stitches during start tacking) …

… F

unction setting [BT

1.4]

(Note)

This no.of stitch correction

can be used when a stop is

no

t ma

de

at e

ach

corn

er

when tacking.

Description

A.

In the above example, the four stitches art used for the start tack advance. T

his is one stitch more than

the no. of stitches set in the start tack setting, so reset it so that it is shorter. Set the no. of correction

stitches to –1. The relation of the no. of correction stitches and setting value is show

n below. S

et thesetting value to [4].

B.

With this setting, the advance section w

ill be one stitch sorter, and the retract section will be increased

by one stitch to three stitches. The no.of stitches w

ill be as set.C

.E

ach time the [D

] key is pressed, the setting will change in order from

0 to 9,A,B

,C,D

,E,and F

.D

.T

he relation of the no. of correction stitches and setting value is as shown below

.

E.

The no.of correction stitches set in B

T1 is com

mon for the start tack, V

tack, M tack, and W

tack.F

.T

he no.of stitches can be corrected easily by using this function and the start tack speed change.

Note :

1.W

hen the function setting[D1.C

ST

] is to adjust taking surely, this fumction setting [B

T1.*]

will be invalidated.

2.T

he setting of “BT

2” “BT

3” and “BT

4” is as same as “B

T1”.

The backstitch solenoid operation timing B

M

UP

DN

N-2

N-1

N

OF

F

ON

(1) Enter program

mode [D

] ([↓] +

[D])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [D

] will be entered.

* Set function to [B

T1]

(4)(5)

* Set to [4]

* Com

plete the [BT

1] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(Ex.) N

o.of start tacking set stitchesA

ctual no.of stitches

3 stitches

3 stitches

4 stitches

2 stitches

Setting

value

No.of

correctionstitches

98

76

54

32

10

AB

CD

EF

-2-1

114

-234

-124

-114

-134

-24

-14

-14

+24

+34

+14

+124

+10

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

BT

2

BT

1

BT

3BT

4

Page 48: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 43 -

No.13 T

o check the error code history and input/output signal(1) H

ow to view

the error code history … …

…function setting [1.E

--], [2.E--], [3.E

--], [4.E--]

(1) Enter program

mode [E

] ([↓] +

[↑] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* The last error code is displayed.

* The second to last error code is displayed.

(Ex. error code E

1 is displayed.) (E

x. error code E3 is displayed.)

(4)(5)

* The third to last error code is displayed.

* The fourth to last error code is displayed.

(Ex. error code E

8 is displayed.) (E

x. error code E2 is displayed.)

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

It is possible to check whether or not input signal is w

ired right.

When the display doesn’t [O

N] even if it turned O

N a signal, check w

iring to a control box from the

signal.

B.

The input term

inal refer to the explanation of the input/output signal and input function name refer to a

C m

ode input signal setting table.

(2) To check input signals …

…function setting [IA

] – [IP], [I1] – [I7], [U

P], [D

N], [E

CA

], [EC

B]

(1) Enter program

mode [E

] ([↓] +

[↑] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [E

] will be entered.

* Select input function to see

(4)

*If the display changes from

[OF

] to [ON

] when the input signal is turned O

N, the operation is norm

al.

(This exam

ple is checking input signal [IA])

When to check the signals of [U

P], [D

N], rotate sew

ing machine shaft and to check the signal of [E

CA

],

[EC

B], rotate m

otor shaft.

(Caution)

Be careful to sew

ing machine operation w

hen turned ON

the signal which the sew

ing

machine operation has relation.

(5) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

A.

The last to fourth to last errors can be view

ed.

B.

Refer to page 140 for the error code.

C.

The display is as in the right figure.

Error code num

ber

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2A

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

The record

number of

times

123

456

Option

0VIA

Page 49: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 44 -

(3) To check output signal (check in operation)…

…function setting [O

AD

]-[OF

D], [O

1D]-[O

7D]

(1) Enter program

mode [E

] ([↓] +

[↑] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [E

] will be entered.

* Select output function to see

(4)(5) R

eturn to the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

* Operate that the output term

inal turned ON

and check display is turned [ON

]

(Caution)

Be careful to sew

ing machine operation w

hen turned ON

the signal which the sew

ing

machine operation has relation.

Description

A.

It is useful function for check a wiring.

B.

The input term

inal refer to the explanation of the input/output signal and input function name refer to a

C m

ode input signal setting table.

(4)T

o check an output terminal

(It is turned ON

an output terminal w

ithout sewing m

achine operation ……

function setting [OA

O]-

[OF

O], [O

1O]-[O

7O])

(1) Enter program

mode [E

] ([↓] +

[↑] +

[A])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [E

] will be entered.

* Select output function to see

(4)(5) R

eturn to the normal m

ode ([↓] +

[↑])

Output signal is turned O

N w

hile pressing the [D] key.

Note) W

hile displaying this function, sewing m

achine can not operate.

Description

A.

It is useful function for check a operation before wiring solenoid.

B.

The input term

inal refer to the explanation of the input/output signal and input function name refer to a

C m

ode input signal setting table.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 50: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 45 -

No.14 T

o return all setting to the factory settings ……

function setting [RE

SE

T]

(1) Enter program

mode [R

] ([↓] +

[B] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [R

] will be entered.

* [RE

SE

T] w

ill flicker when the [D

] key is pressed.

(4)

* When the [D

] key is held down (for tw

o seconds), all settings will be returned to the factory settings.

Description

A.

When the norm

al mode w

ill be entered pressing the [D] key w

hen displayed [RE

SE

T], all settings w

ill be

returned to the factory settings.

B.

To return the norm

al mode from

the [RE

SE

T], press the [↓

] key while holding dow

n the [↑] key.

(Caution)

When this function is set, the contents of all settings to this point w

ill be cleared, and will

return to the factory settings. Please take care w

hen using this function.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 51: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 46 -

11. HO

W T

O S

ET

CO

UN

TE

R F

UN

CT

ION

1. To use the counter function

(1) The outline of the counter function

By setting a counter function w

hich is shown in the follow

ing figure, it is possible to do the operation to want.

[P] key function selection

[C] m

ode [IP] = [C

CL] : C

lear counter(counter w

ith control panel [P] key

clearness)

(2) Exam

ple for counter function

* The counting product am

ount and bobbin thread are enabled with up and dow

n counter.

1 UP

counter for product amount (one hundred tim

es)

(1)U

p counter “U” is add at each thread trim

ming.

(2)W

hen up counter amount “U

” become the setting am

ount “P”, sew

ing will be prohibited.

(3)W

hen the input signal “I1” is turned on, Up counter am

ount become zero and sew

ing become

possible.

(1) Enter program

mode “C

” ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode [C

] will entered.

* Set function to [I1]

(4)(5)

* Set to [C

CL]

* Com

plete the [I1] function setting

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Count by

* Thread trimm

ing (CU

, PR

)* N

umber of stitch (S

T)* E

xternal input signal (IN)

* External output signal (O

U)

Selection

The action aftercount over

Counting

conditionC

ounter clearcondition

Selection

Set of the [U

SC

], [DS

C]

Buzzer sound and sew

ing will be prohibited (S

T)B

uzzer sound and sewing is available (B

Z)N

o buzzer sound and sewing is available (O

F)

The case :C

hanging sewing pattern.

Turning on power sw

itch.

[UC

M], [D

CM

], [PC

M]

Exam

ple:

UP

counter for productioncounter

:D

own counter for rem

ainbobbin thread counter.(P

lease refer the example

on page 81.)

Counter function

UP

counter valid : [UP

C]=[O

N]

DO

WN

counter valid : [DN

C]=[O

N]

To use the control panel(X

C-E

500Y)

[C] m

ode [CN

F] setting ([F

] keydisplay)[C

NF]=[D

N] : D

OW

N counter display

[CN

F]=[UP

] : UP

counter display([C

NF]=[S

P] : S

peed display)([C

NF]=[S

E] : S

ensor needle numeric

display)

Adjustm

ent of counter amount

to use input signal

Counter value setting

UP

counter value : [P]=[****]

DO

WN

counter value : [N]=[****]

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

a

a

a

aa

a

a

Page 52: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 47 -

(7) Enter program

mode “B

” ([↓] +

[B])

(8)(9)

* Program

mode [B

] will be entered.

* Set function to [P

]

(10)(11)

* Set to [100]

* Com

plete the [P] function setting

(12)(13)

* Set function to [C

UP

] * S

et to [PR

]

(14)(15)

* Com

plete the [CU

P] function setting

* Set function to [U

PC

]

(16)(17)

* Set to [O

N]

* Com

plete the [UP

C] function setting

(18)(19)

* Set function to [P

RN

] * S

et to [1]

(20)

* Com

plete the [PR

N] function setting

(21) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

Selection the function on program

mode “C

”.

[I1,CC

L] : Input signal “I1” is set to counter clear function.

Selection the function on program

mode “B

”.

[P.100] S

et the setting amount of up counter “P

”. This am

ount become the target am

ount for up counter.

*[U

.0] Current up counter am

ount “0”

[CU

P.P

R] : ”P

RN

” function is that up counter is added at each trimm

ing time.

(”PR

N” is set “1”, up counter is added each trim

ming tim

e in this example)

*[U

SC

.ST

] :W

hen the amount of current up counter “U

” become setting am

ount “P”, sew

ing will be

prohibited

Input signal “I1” is set to the following function. W

hen it is turned on, sewing becom

e

possible.

[UP

C.O

N] S

et “UP

C” to “O

N” to use up counter.

[PR

N.1] one trim

ming tim

e add one count amount.

Mark “ * ” is factory setting.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 53: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 48 -

2. Dow

n counter for bobbin remain thread count (10,000 stitches is count over)

[1]D

own counter “D

” is subtracted at each ten stitches.

[2]W

hen down counter am

ount “D” becom

e zero, sewing w

ill be prohibited.

[3]W

hen the input signal “I1” is turned on, Dow

n counter amount becom

e “N” stitch and sew

ing become

possible.

(1) Enter program

mode “C

” ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “C

” will be entered.

* Set to “I1”Å

iInput signalÅj

(4)(5)

* Set to “C

CL” (Input function)

* Com

plete the “I1” function setting.

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(1) Enter to program

mode “B

” ([↓] +

[B])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “B

” will be entered.

* Set to “N

(4)(5)

* Set to “1000”

* Com

plete the “N” function setting.

(6)(7)

* Set to “D

” * S

et to “1000”

(8)(9)

* Com

plete the “N” function setting

* Set to “C

DN

(10)(11)

* Set to “S

T”

* Com

plete the “CD

N” function setting

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 54: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 49 -

(12)(13)

* Set to “D

NC

” * S

et to “ON

(14)(15)

* Com

plete the “DN

C” function setting

* Set to “C

NU

(16)(17)

* Set to “10”

* Com

plete the “CN

U” function setting

(18) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

Selection the function on program

mode “C

”.

[I1,CC

L] : Input signal “I1” is set to counter clear function.

Selection the function on program

mode “B

”.

[N.1000] S

et the setting amount of up counter “N

”. This am

ount is start amount of dow

n count.

[CD

N.S

T] : W

hen stitch amount becom

e the amount set by “C

NU

”, down counter “D

” is subtracted one.

(”CN

U” is set “10”, so dow

n counter is subtracted at each ten stitches in this example)

*[D

SC

.ST

] :W

hen the amount of current dow

n counter become zero, sew

ing will be prohibited

Inp

ut

signal “I1” is set to the following function. W

hen it is turned on, sewing becom

e possible.

[DN

C.O

N] S

et “DN

C” to “O

N” to use dow

n counter.

[CN

U.10] T

en stitches subtract one count amount.

Mark “ * ” is factory setting.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 55: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 50 -

3. How

to Adjust current count am

ount to use input signal.

(1) Enter program

mode “C

” ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “C

” will be entered.

* Set to “I1” (Input signal)

(4)(5)

* Set to “IO

1” * C

omplete the “I1” function setting

(6)(7)

* Set to “I2” (Input signal)

* Set to “IO

2”

(8)

* Com

plete the “I2” function setting

(9) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(1) Enter program

mode “B

” ([↓] +

[B])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “B

” will be entered.

* Set to “C

CI”

(4)(5)

* Set to “O

N”

* Com

plete the “CC

I” function setting.

(6) Return to the norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

Selection the function on program

mode “C

”.

[I1.IO1] Input signal “I1” is set to “IO

1” function.

[I2.IO2] Input signal “I2” is set to “IO

2” function.

Selection the function on program

mode “B

”.

[CC

L.ON

] When input signal “I1” is turned on both counter w

ill be added one amount.

[CC

L.ON

] When input signal “I2” is turned on both counter w

ill be subtracted one amount.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

369

258

147

1211

10

1514

13

Option B

counterInput signalI1

Input signalI2

Page 56: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 51 -

12. SE

TT

ING

IN T

HE

TH

RE

AD

TR

IMM

ING

MO

DE

TR

1) Thread trim

ming tim

ing when thread trim

ming m

ode TR

setting is PR

G

(1) Output tim

ing of thread trimm

ing output

F1(m

s) F

D(m

s)

Notes : *1. T

he wiper output [W

] operation will be special according to the G

mode W

MD

setting.

*2. The presser foot lifter [F

U] chopping duty can be set w

ith FU

D in the P

and C m

ode.

Run signal S

1

Needle D

OW

Nposition D

NN

eedle UP

position UP

ON

ON

ON

Thread trimm

ingT

LTM setting

T1T2T3T4

TKTST7

Tread release L

LLM setting

L1L2L3L4LKLSL7

TS

(Deg)

T2(m

s)

TS

(Deg)

TE

(Deg)

TS

(Deg)

T2(m

s)

T1(m

s)T

2(ms)

TS

(Deg)

T1(m

s) T

2(ms)

LS(D

eg)L2(m

s)

LS(D

eg)LE

(Deg)

LS(D

eg) L2(m

s)

L1(ms)

L2(ms)

LS(D

eg) L1(m

s) L2(m

s)

Wiper W

Presser foot lifter FU

*1

*2

W1(m

s) W

2(x 10 ms)

F(x10 m

s)M

otor ON

Cannot be used.

Cannot be used.

Cannot be used.

Cannot be used.

Page 57: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 52 -

(2) Wiper output tim

ing

Wiper output O

FF

timing w

ith (S2) signal W

MD

(in program m

ode G) [1]

* Wiper output O

FF

timing is changed by S

2 signal OF

F tim

ing like above chart [1] and [2].

Wiper output W

WM

D setting

WOR

AN

Wiper output W

WM

D setting

WOR

AN

Thread trim

ming

signal S2

ON

Needle D

OW

Nposition D

NN

eedle UP

position UP

Sew

ing machine

Wiper output setting tim

e

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

W1 [m

s] W

2(x10)

[1]

[2]

Page 58: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 53 -

2) Sew

ing machine m

otion pattern

Thread trim

ming m

ode [TR

] in program m

ode P or G

……

Function setting [T

R[P

RG

]]

(1) Function setting [T

RM

[LK]] in program

mode G

[1] Full-heeling after 2 position stop

[2]Full-heeling after 1 position stop

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Speed H

Sew

ing machineS

peed T0

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Speed H

Sew

ing machineS

peed T0

Page 59: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 54 -

(2) Function setting [T

RM

[RK

]] in program m

ode G (F

unction setting [S2R

[OF

] ])

[1] Full-heeling after 2 position stop (T

acking is invalid.)

Notes : 1. T

he same operation as G

mode T

RM

=LK w

ill occur when set to 1 position.

2. The reverse angle can be set w

ith R8 in the P

mode. (*1)

[2] Full-heeling (2 position) (T

acking is invalid)

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Sew

ing machine F

orward

Reverse

*1 R8(D

eg)

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Sew

ing machine F

orward

Reverse

*1 R8(D

eg)

Page 60: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 55 -

13. OU

TP

UT

TF

, TB

TIM

ING

S

1) Output norm

al timing

Note)

1.T

he TF

output start time can be set w

ith R1 in the G

mode.

The T

F output tim

e can be set with R

2 in the G m

ode.

2.T

he above-mentioned tim

ing is function setting [TR

M[LK

]] in program m

ode G.

2) Function setting [R

U [O

N] ] in program

mode P

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Sew

ing machine

Output T

B

Output T

F

R1=40 m

s R

2=66 ms

Run signal S

1

Thread trimm

ing signal S2

Needle D

OW

N position D

N

Needle U

P position U

P

Sew

ing machine

Output T

B

Output T

F

R1=40 m

sR

2=66 ms

Page 61: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 56 -

14. OU

TP

UT

KS

1,KS

2,KS

3 TIM

ING

S

Note)

The K

S1 to K

S3 output start tim

e and output time can be set w

ith K11 to K

32 in the S m

ode.

(Caution)

This tim

ing chart (sequence) is only available when [S

QS

] is set to [NO

].

When [S

QS

] is not set to [NO

], please refer to “[15] Sim

ple sequence”.

ON

ON

Run signal S

1

Thread trim

ming signal S

2

Sew

ing machine

Output K

S1

Output K

S2

Output K

S3

K11=70m

sK

12=70 ms

K22=70

ms

K21=70m

s

K31=70m

sK

32=70 ms

Needle D

OW

N position stop

Needle U

P position stop

Page 62: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 57 -

15. SIM

PLE

SE

QU

EN

CE

The function outputs [K

S1], [K

S2] and [K

S3] can be set as sim

ple sequence outputs.T

o set the simple sequence output, the starting conditions [IN

] [T] [R

] [S] [T

R] [S

B] [G

O] are set in the

simple sequence starting condition

Setting function [S

QS

] of the [S] m

ode. With this, function outputs [K

S1],[K

S2] and [K

S3] w

ill be simple

sequence outputs. (The default setting is the [N

O] setting.)

1. Sim

ple sequence starting conditionsT

he function outputs [KS

1],[KS

2] and [KS

3] can be set as simple sequence outputs.

[NO

]: T

he simple sequence is not started. (T

he default setting is the [NO

] setting.) (R

efer to “[18] Output K

S1,K

S2,K

S3 tim

ings”.)[IN

]: W

hen input signal I4 (IN4) is turned O

N.

[T]

: When thread trim

ming is com

pleted.[R

]: W

hen operation is starting.[S

]: W

hen motor is stopped. (T

his also includes when single-stitch operation is stopped.)

[TR

]: W

hen starting stitching after thread trimm

ing.[S

B]

: When start tacking is com

pleted. (This w

ill not start if the start tacking setting is “NO

”.)[G

O]

: Alw

ays start.

2. Sim

ple sequence output timing chart

Explanation of setting function

(a)Sequence output [K

S1][K

S2][K

S3] output start tim

e/No. of stitch setting changeover [N

S1][N

S2][N

S3]

[OF

] setting : Tim

e setting ([K11][K

21][K31] : 10 m

sec unit)[O

N] setting : N

o. of stitch setting ([K11][K

21][K31])

(b) Sequence output [K

S1][K

S2][K

S3] output start tim

e/No. of stitch setting changeover [N

S1][N

S2][N

S3]

[OF

] setting : Tim

e setting ([K12][K

22][K32] : 10 m

sec unit)[O

N] setting : N

o. of stitch setting ([K12][K

22][K32])

(c) Sequence output [K

S1][K

S2][K

S3] output reference setting [S

1S][S

2S][S

3S]

[OF

] setting : The output start reference w

ill be as shown in the tim

ing chart[2-1]above.[O

N] setting :T

he output start reference will be the input signal O

N reference as show

n in the timing

chart[2-2] above(d) S

equence output [KS

1][KS

2][KS

3] output reference setting [S1E

][S2E

][S3E

][O

F] setting : T

he output end reference will be as show

n in the timing chart [2-1] above.

[ON

] setting :The output end reference w

ill be the input signal ON

reference as shown in the tim

ingchart [2-2] above

Note)

1.W

hen using the simple sequence m

ake each simple sequence related setting show

nabove, and assign the function output [K

S1][K

S2][K

S3] to the output setting of the output

pin being used by setting the C m

ode output function.2.

If the starting conditions are not set in the simple sequence setting starting condition

setting [SQ

S] above (w

hen [NO

] is set), the function output [KS

1][KS

2][KS

3] will have the

output timing show

n on the next page.

S3S

[ON

]S

3E[O

N]

2-1.S

tart (The operation w

ill start when the starting conditions are satisfied.)

Start (T

he operation will start w

hen the starting conditions are satisfied.)2-2.

Output K

S1

Output K

S2

Output K

S3

Input signal I2

Output K

S1

Input signal I7

Output K

S2

Input signal I6

Output K

S3

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

K11

K12

K21

K22

K31

K32

K11

K12

S1S

[ON

]S

1E[O

N]

K21

K22

S2S

[ON

]S

2E[O

N]

K31

K32

Page 63: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 58 -

3. When starting condition setting [S

QS

] is [NO

] (default setting)

Output tim

ing of output [KS

1] [KS

2] [KS

3]

[KS

1] : Output for [K

12] after the [K11] tim

e after the motor starts rotating.

[KS

2] : Output for [K

22] after the [K21] tim

e after the motor stops.

[KS

3] : Output for [K

32] after the [K31] after thread trim

ming (or needle lift) stop by pedal heeling.

Note)

1.T

he output [KS

1] [KS

2] [KS

3] output start time and output tim

e can be adjusted with

[K11] [K

32] in the [S] m

ode.

4. Exam

ple of simple sequence setting

When the follow

ing timing output is to be output to the option B

connector’s No.3 pin,N

o.12 pin and No.15 pin.

[OU

T1][O

UT

2][OU

T3]

Setting

1. Function setting of [C] m

ode

(1) Output function setting

O1 K

S1

O2 K

S2

O3 K

S3

(2) Input function settingI2 IO

1

2. Function setting of [S] m

ode

(1) Sim

ple sequence starting condition settingS

QS

T

(2) KS

1 output’s output start time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

S1 O

N

(3) KS

1 output’s output time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

E1 O

N

(4) KS

1 output’s output start reference settingS

1S O

N

(5) KS

1 output’s output end reference settingS

1E O

N

(6) KS

2 output’s output start time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

S2 O

F

(7) KS

2 output’s output time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

E2 O

F

(8) KS

2 output’s output start reference settingS

2S O

F

(9) KS

2 output’s output end reference settingS

2E O

F

(10) KS

3 output’s output start time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

S3 O

N

(11) KS

3 output’s output time/N

o. of stitch setting changeoverN

E3 O

F

(12) KS

3 output’s output start reference settingS

3S O

F

(13) KS

3 output’s output end reference settingS

3E O

F

(14) KS

1 output’s output start No. of stitches * output N

o. of stitches settingK

11 3K

12 3

(15) KS

2 output’s output start time * output tim

eK

21 0K

22 6

(16) KS

3 output’s output start No. of stitches * output tim

eK

31 12K

32 8

Run input S

1

Trim

input S2

Sew

ing machine

Output K

S1

Output K

S2

Output K

S3

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

K12=70

ms

K11=70m

s

K21=70

ms

K22=70

ms

K31=70

ms

K32=70

ms

ON

ON

ON

ON

Input signal I2

Output K

S1

Output K

S2

Output LS

3

K11=3 stitch

K12=5 stitch

K21=0 m

s K

22=60 ms

K32=80 m

sK31=12stitch

Start (T

he operation will start w

hen the starting conditions are satisfied.)

Page 64: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 59 -

16. CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N F

UN

CT

ION

Specification

Connector

Mini-D

IN connector 6-pin

Signal level

Doing based of R

S-232C

Baud rate

9600 bps

Operation m

odeA

syncrouns

Start bit

1 bit

Data length

8 bit

Parity

none

Stop bit

1 bit

Record form

atO

riginal

Function

The reading w

ith various multiple tim

e and various counter-value

1. About the com

munication

When com

munication am

ong the equipment, it becom

es the method w

hich returns the reply by receiving a

direction by this product.

Equipm

ent (being computers such as the personal com

puter in this comm

unication function) on the side

which issues this direction is called a parent m

achine and equipment

(being SC

-380 form control board in this com

munication function)

The child m

achine sends an answer only to the inquiry from

the parent machine.

For exam

ple, when w

anting to take out data continuously, it makes require repeat data on the side of the

parent machine. T

he form of the data, the electric characteristic, the com

munication protocol and so on

must be each other adjusted, to com

municate difference m

achine.

1-1. The electric characteristic

It defines the definition of the voltage level and High/Low

of the signal, the airlines of the comm

unication

and so on. This com

munication function is based on R

S-232C

which are an international standard, the

parent machine w

hich has to do RS

-232C or of R

S-232C

display and based a can be connected with.

1-2. The com

munication procedure (protocol)

The protocol to be using for this com

munication function is the original m

ethod of the SC

-380. Because this

protocol can not be changed, make a program

to agree with this protocol on the side of the parent m

achine.

2. Wiring

2-1. The pin arrangem

ent by the connector

Connector H

Pin num

berS

ignal name

I/OT

he use

1R

XD

IR

eceive data

2–

No use

3T

XD

OS

end data

4C

OM

Control com

mon

5+

12 VP

ower supply

6–

No use

Peripheral plate

FG

Grounding for the shield

Page 65: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 60 -

2-2. The m

anufacturing of the data

It makes the w

iring figure of the following figure reference and m

anufacture machine.

a cable and connect a child machine and a parent

Note : P

lease be careful because the pin number to the signal and so on depend on the com

puter.

2-3. The attention item

in case of wiring

(1)Please use a num

erous wick cable w

ith the shield and the shield connect with F

G surely.

(2)The w

iring distance depend on the environment around but use at the distance w

hich is as short as

possible.

3. The basic procedure3-1. C

omm

ands

Transm

itting a user comm

and to the child machine from

the parent machine.

It is answered that it does A

CK

to these all transmissions of it. (N

ote 1)

Note)

1.A

s for the partial comm

and, the data which it w

as answered that it does and input condition

itself become A

CK

. And all data transfer is used by A

SC

II code.

3-2. The sending and receiving of the various com

mand.

3-2-1. User com

mand (P

arent machine →

Child m

achine)

It manufactures optional data and it answ

ers when receiving data.

(1) 9-byte fixation

SC

-380

Parent side

Signal nam

eC

ontents

FG

Ground

——

——

TX

DS

end data

RX

DR

eceive data

CO

MC

omm

on for the signal

——

Child side

Signal nam

e

RX

D

—TX

D

CO

M

+12 V

—FG

Parent m

achineC

hild machine

(1) User com

mand

(2) User com

mand data

(3) AC

KP

ersonal computer and so on

?C

omm

andC

heck sumC

RLF

14

21

1

?S

tart code

Com

mand

“SY

SV

”A

nswer the version of the system

.

“DA

TV”

Answ

er the version of the EE

PR

OM

data.

“TYP

E”

Answ

er the type.

“ **** ”C

omm

and (Refer to the com

mand list)

Check sum

Add A

SC

II code of user comm

and and invert all bit (refer note 1)

CR

+ LFE

nd code

Answ

er of the data (Child m

achine → P

arent machine)

Com

mand

Page 66: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 61 -

(2) 13-byte fixation

(3) 13-byte fixation

Note)

1.F

or example to m

ake check sum of (13-byte fixation com

mand “type”) *refer 4-1. T

heuser com

mand 1.

1)”type” A

SC

II code is 54,59,50.45.2)

Add A

SC

II code. (54+59+

50+45=

142)3)

It uses 2 digits below for the com

putation. (use 42 of 142)It uses 42 out of 142.

4)Invert all bit of 42. (A

gain, it hangs reduction 1 and it adds up 1.)T

he result which inverted all bit of 42 is B

D.

5)T

he check sum is B

D T

he check sum is B

D.

4. The com

munication com

mand list

4-1. The user com

mand 1 (P

ermitted to data clear)

#S

tart code

Com

mand

Received com

mand (echo)

Data

Data w

hich corresponded to the comm

and

Check sum

Add A

SC

II code of user comm

and and Data and invert all bit (refer note)

CR

+ LF

End code

At the tim

e of the reception error, following A

CK

is returned.A

nswer of A

CK

(Child m

achine → P

arent machine)

Form

of the answer data

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

Num

erical value

#C

omm

andD

ataC

heck sumC

RLF

14

42

11

#S

tart code

E000

Norm

al end

E001

Recode type error

E002

Check sum

error

No used

Unsettled

Check sum

Add A

SC

II code of user comm

and and invert all bit (refer note 1)

CR

+ LFE

nd code

E***

#E

**N

o usedC

heck sumC

RLF

14

42

11

Com

mand

PP

WH

PP

WL

PM

TH

PM

TL

PS

TH

PS

TL

PF

UH

PF

UL

PT

RM

TPW

H

TPW

L

TMTH

TMTL

TSTH

TSTL

FULH

FULL

TTRM

TC

YC

Contents

Integrating power supply tim

e1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating power supply tim

e2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Integrating motor O

N tim

e1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating motor O

N tim

e2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Integrating needle stitches1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating needle stitches2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Full speed tim

e1 (upper 1 word)

Full speed tim

e2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Thread trim

ming the num

ber of times

Integrating power supply tim

e 1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating power supply tim

e 2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Integrating motor O

N tim

e 1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating motor O

N tim

e 2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Integrating needle stitches 1 (upper 1 word)

Integrating needle stitches 2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Full speed time 1 (upper 1 w

ord)

FULL Full speed tim

e 2 (lower 1 w

ord)

Thread trimm

ing the number of tim

es

Num

ber of the integrating cycles (UP

CO

NT

ER

)

Page 67: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 62 -

Form of the answ

er dataN

umerical value

(Only subordinate position 15 bit is used).

9 : Solenoid overcurrent

8 : Detector error

6 : Noise error

5 : EE

PR

OM

error4 : M

otor connector omission

3 : Encoder error. M

otor, sewing m

achine lock error2 : O

ver voltage1 : Transistor m

odule error

FFFF (YE

S)

0000 (NO

)N

umerical value

Num

erical valueN

umerical value

Num

erical valueN

umerical value

FFFF (YE

S)

0000 (NO

)FFFF (Y

ES

)0000 (N

O)

Num

erical valueFFFF (P

resser foot OFF)

0000 (Presser foot O

N)

FFFF (YE

S)

0000 (NO

)FFFF (C

onnected)0000 (none)FFFF (Y

ES

)0000 (N

O)

Num

erical valueO

nly subordinate position 4 bit is used.***0 The num

ber of trimm

ing times becom

e “1”***1 The num

ber of sewing stitch becom

e “N”

(Function setting [CU

N.] in program

mode B

)***2 The num

ber of trimm

ing times becom

e “N”

(Function setting [PR

N.] in program

mode B

)***3 W

hen input function “IO1” becom

e ON

.***4 W

hen output function “O1” becom

e ON

.N

ote : *** is irregular.O

nly subordinate position 4 bit is used.***0 The num

ber of trimm

ing times becom

e “1”***1 The num

ber of sewing stitch becom

e “N”

(Function setting [CU

N.] in program

mode B

)***2 The num

ber of trimm

ing times becom

e “N”

(Function setting [PR

N.] in program

mode B

)***3 W

hen input function “IO1” becom

e ON

.***4 W

hen output function “O1” becom

e ON

.N

ote : *** is irregular.

Num

erical valueN

umerical value

(Only subordinate position 12 bit is used.)

Com

mand

ER

OR

ER

R1

ER

R2

ER

R3

ER

R4

ER

NW

PA

T.

US

ET

UC

NT

DS

ET

DC

NT

UP

CT

DP

CT

SP

DD

OS

AE

TH

RE

BO

X_

MO

VE

SR

V_

UT

YP

DT

YP

WT

_V

OLT

TY

PE

SY

SV

DA

TV

Contents

Error code

Error code O

nce aheadE

rror code Tw

ice aheadE

rror code Three tim

es aheadE

rror code Four tim

es aheadIn the error

Pattern num

berU

P counter setting value

UP

counter valueD

OW

N counter setting value

DO

WN

counter valueU

P counter O

N/O

FF

DO

WN

counter ON

/OF

F

Setting speed

Condition of the presser foot lift

Thread break detector O

N/O

FF

Control panel (C

onnected/none)

In sewing

The principal axis num

ber of rotationsP

resent count UP

way

Present count D

OW

N w

ay

Watt

Voltage

Sw

ing machine type

Version of the system

Version of the data

Page 68: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 63 -

4-2. User data com

mand 2 (D

ata clear comm

and)

4-3. User com

mand 3

(Caution)

3 BIT

of the place is the order.

13 BIT

of the subordinate position is time (unit of 0.1 s) or frequency.

(Reference chart 1)

Com

mand

Contents

Form

of the answer data

MT

ON

Motor O

N tim

eN

umerical value

MT

OF

Motor O

FF

time

Num

erical value

AT

ON

Idle time after the thread trim

ming

Num

erical value

AT

OF

The integrating tim

e to the thread trimm

ingN

umerical value

CY

ON

Idle time after the one cycle

Num

erical value

CY

OF

One cycle tim

eN

umerical value

CY

OS

One-cycle foot lifting frequency (m

ultiplication)N

umerical value

CY

TR

One-cycle thread trim

ming frequency (m

ultiplication)N

umerical value

CY

MT

One-cycle m

otor stop frequency (multiplication)

Num

erical value

ATO

N(1) A

TOF(1)

ATO

N(3)

ATO

N(4)

ATO

F(4)

Com

mand

Contents

Form

of the answer data

PP

CL

Integrating power supply tim

e clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

PM

CL

Integrating motor O

N tim

e clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

PS

CL

Integrating needle stitches clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

PF

CL

Full speed tim

e clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

PT

CL

Integrating needle stitches clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

PC

CL

Num

ber of the integrating cycles clearD

ata which can be cleared becom

es 0.

CY

OS

CY

OS

(1) =0

CY

OS

(2) =5

CY

TR

CY

TR

(1) =0

CY

TR

(2) =3

CY

MT

CY

MT

(1) =0

CY

MT

(2) =4

Foot lifter

Sew

ing machine

( : T

hread trimm

ing)

onon

onon

onon

MTON(1)

MTOF(1)

MTON(2)

MTOF(2)

MTON(3)

MTOF(3)

MTON(4)

MTOF(4)

MTON(5)

MTOF(5)

MTON(6)

MTOF(6)

MTON(7)

MTOF(7)

CY

ON

(1)C

YO

N(2)

ATOF(2)

ATO

N(2)

ATO

N(3)

CY

OF

(1)

Page 69: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 64 -

17.H

OW

TO C

HA

NG

E V

OLTA

GE

OF P

AN

EL C

ON

NE

CTO

R A

ND

SO

LEN

OID

RE

TUR

N S

PE

ED

1. To change S

olenoid voltage 24 V/30 V

. (Refer to page 13.)

2. How

to change the output voltage DC

5 V/12 V

(1)Rem

ove the cover.

(2)The D

C5 V

/12 V can be changed w

ith the J2, J6,J7,J10 and J11 connector on the printed circuit

board on the cover side as shown next page.

(3)This is set to 12 V

when shipped from

the factory. To change from

5 V to 12 V

, pull out the connector

and reinsert it into the 5 V side.

This is set to 5 V

when shipped from

the factory. To change from

12 V to 5 V

, pull out the connector

and reinsert it into the 12 V side.

(4)The pow

er supply (+12 V

) voltage will change form

12 V to 5 V

by changing the J10 connector from

12 V to 5 V

.

Position detector

(5)The pow

er supply (+12 V

) voltage will change form

12 V to 5 V

by changing the J11 connector from

12 V to 5 V

. (When w

anting to make change gears of the sew

ing machine possibly at variable speed

comm

and of 5 V, set the setting value of pedal curve function setting <

PD

C>

by the A m

ode.)

Lever (white connector)

(6)The pow

er supply (+12 V) voltage w

ill change form 12 V

to 5 V by changing the J7 connector from

12

V to 5 V

.

Option A

eJ2, J7, J10, J11

+5 V

+12 V

J2, J7, J10, J11

+5 V

+12 V

+5 V

+12 V

+5 V

+12 V

eJ6

J6

0 V1

—2

Ground

3

UP

4

DO

WN

5

+12 V

/ (+5 V

)6

0 V1

S1 : R

un (Variable speed)

2

S2 : T

read trimm

ing3

S3 : P

resser foot lifte4

VC

: Variable speed com

mand

5

+12 V

6

0 V1

PS

U : U

p position stop input2

+12 V

3

PS

D : D

own position stop input

4

CK

U : U

p position output5

S0 : Low

speed input6

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

Page 70: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 65 -

(7)The output of pin num

ber 2, 5,13,14 will change from

12 V to 5 V

by changing the J2 connector from

12 V to 5 V

, also the power supply (+

5 V : P

in number 7) voltage w

ill change form 5 V

to 12 V by

changing the J6 connector from 5 V

to 12 V.

Option B

0 V1

No setting

2

OT

1 : Virtual output

3

VC

2 : Variable speed com

mand

4

No setting

5

IO1 : V

irtual input6

+5 V

7

+30 V

8

U : N

eedle lift signal9

0 V10

+30 V

11

NC

L : Needle cooler output

12

No setting

13

No setting

14

TF

: “TF

” output15

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…5 V

= =

> 12 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

…12 V

= =

> 5 V

Option A

DC

5 V/12 V

changeover switch

Option B

DC

5 V/12 V

changeover switch

(Pin N

o.7)

Option B

DC

5 V/12 V

changeover switch

(Pin N

o. 2, 5, 13, 14P

ull up Voltage)

Position detector

DC

5 V/12 V

changeover switch

Lever connectorD

C5 V

/12 Vchangeover sw

itch

Page 71: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 66 -

3. How

to set the switch for increasing the solenoid return speed.

(1) Rem

ove the cover.

(2)The solenoid return speed can be increased w

ith the setting of the J1, J5, J8 connector on the

printed circuit board on the cover side as shown on the last page.

(3)Connector factory settings and solenoid return

(4)Set the connector setting from

SLO

W to F

AS

T increase the solenoid return speed.

(Caution)

The solenoid return cannot be increased if solenoid output chopping duty O

AC

, OD

C,

and O3C

is return ON

in the program m

ode [C].

The resistance on the printed circuit board w

ill be burnt out if the solenoid return

speed is increased.

If “UN

ION

SP

EC

IAL” [U

N1], [U

N2] and [U

N3] are set in program

mode [2], alw

ays use

J1 and J8 set at SLO

W (solenoid return is norm

al), J5 set at FA

ST

(solenoid return is

fast).

J1F

AS

TS

ewing m

achine connector I1-I2 pin output.N

ormal

OC

J5S

LOW

Sew

ing machine connector 3-4 pin output.

Norm

alO

A

J8S

LOW

Sew

ing machine connector 7-8 pin output.

Norm

alO

D

Output

Solenoidreturn

Output during sim

ple settingC

onnectorfactorysetting

Connector

Page 72: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 67 -

18. HO

W T

O S

ET

TH

RE

AD

BR

EA

K D

ET

EC

TO

R

1. Setting T

hread break detector function

(1) Set to program

mode “Q

” ([↓] +

[A] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “Q

” will be entered.

* Set to “T

H”

(4)(5)

* Set to “O

N”

* Com

plete the “TH

” function setting.

(6) Return to norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

(1) Set to program

mode “C

” ([↓] +

[C])

(2)(3)

* Program

mode “C

” will be entered.

* Set to “I1”

(4)(5)

* Set to “T

HI”

* Com

plete the “I1” function setting.

(6)(7)

* Set to “O

1” * S

et to “TH

O”

(8)

* Com

plete the “O1” function setting.

(9) Return to norm

al mode ([↓

] + [↑

])

Description

Selection the function on program

mode “Q

”.

[TH

.ON

]T

o use upper thread break detector function, set to “ON

[TH

.OF

F]

Upper thread break detector function is invalid.

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

MA

1-2B

SL

CD

Page 73: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 68 -

Selection the function on program

mode “C

”.

2. Tim

ing chart of thread break input and output.

Term

(1) :S

ewing m

achine speed is under “B” speed, so it neglect thread break function.

Term

(2) :A

fter sewing m

achine speed become over “B

” speed,still under “TH

S” stitch am

ount, so it neglect

thread break function.

Term

(3) :T

hread break function is valid.

Term

(4) :T

he judgment stitch am

ount “TH

F” of thread break, after this stitch am

ount, thread break function

move to “T

ST

” function.

Setting the action, after thread w

as broken.

“TH

O” output function becom

e on and continue to sew.

“TH

O” output function becom

e on and trimm

ing thread.

“TH

O” output function becom

e on and sewing m

achine will be stooped.

* When the sew

ing machine run,”T

HO

” output will be clear.

To set the speed neglect thread break function.

When sew

ing machine rotation speed becom

e under this speed, it neglect thread break function.

[B.] S

etting the neglecting stitch amount from

first stitch.

Setting the judgm

ent stitch amount of thread break.

[TS

T]

[NO

.]

[TR

.]

[ST

.]

[B.]

[TH

S.]

[TH

F]

[I1.TH

I]N

o.6 pin of option connector B w

ill be set to thread break input function.

[O1.T

HO

]N

o.3 pin of option connector B w

ill be set to thread break output function.

ON

ON

ON

run signal S1

Sew

ing machine S

peed “B”

Thread break input [T

HI]

Thread break output[T

HO

]

Fig 1 T

iming chart

(1)(2)

(3) (4)

Page 74: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 69 -

19. CU

TT

ER

OU

TP

UT

1) Cutter

Note)

Use of the I*1 input is prohibited w

hen using the blower output.

F m

ode setting

Note)

1.A

lways set O

2M to O

N even w

hen not using the air output.

2.C

ustomize the option connectors I1, I2 and O

1 to O3 to the required functions using the

program m

ode beforehand.

If operation is started after thesensor input IO

2 has turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is

stopped, the output will be

canceled when C

TS is O

N.

ON

ON

ON

OF

FFoot sw

itch (sensor)IO

2

Manual cutter input

I*3

Air outputO

T2

Cutter output

OT3

Blow

er outputO

T1

CTY

=ON

O2M

=ON

O3M

=ON

OIB

=ON

CO

AC

OB

SD

SD

SD

CO

C

Output canceled

when C

SC

is ON

.O

utput canceled when

CS

C is O

N.

Output

canceledw

hen CS

Cis O

N.

Specification

Set O

T1 output to blow

er output.

Set O

T2 output to air output.

Set O

T3 output to cutter output.

Add m

esh judgment control to IO

2 input. (If output stays ON

or OF

F for longer than the m

esh

judgment tim

e set with E

D, the IO

2 input will not be fixed.)

Set I*3 input to m

anual cutter input.

Set O

T3 cutter output to both O

FF

→ O

N and O

N →

OF

F of IO

2 photo switch.

When IO

3 is ON

, turn OT

3 output ON

/OF

F per set N

o. of stitches.

No. of stitches A

No. of stitches B

No. of stitches C

Cutter O

N tim

e

Mesh judgm

ent time

The output of the autom

atic cutter output is prohibited while the sensor is O

N.

The output of the autom

atic cutter output is prohibited while the sensor is O

FF

.

The output of the autom

atic cutter output is prohibited while the sensor input is O

N w

hile the

sewing m

achine is stopped.

Function nam

e

O1B

O2M

O3M

I2M

CT

Y

CT

M

CT

R

CO

A

CO

B

CO

C

SD

ED

CS

C

CE

C

CT

C

Page 75: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 70 -

2) BT

specifications (*1) operation chart and required settings

*1 :W

hen CT

L is set to ON

, the BT

specification operation will be applied after the I*1 input turns O

N.

(If the BT

output is turned OF

F after I*1 turns O

FF

, the BT

specifications will be canceled.)

*2 :S

1 is invalidated after the photo sensor detection.

Operation w

ill restart after stopping and then turning S1 O

FF

and ON

.

*3 :M

edium speed preset stitching w

hen photo sensor turns OF

F after B

T input.

*4 :U

p position stop after thread trimm

ing.

*5 :N

ot output when photo sensor is O

FF

after BT

input.

Note)

1.A

lways set O

2M to O

N even w

hen not using the air output.

2.C

ustomize the option connectors I1, I2 and O

1 to O3 to the required functions using the

program m

ode beforehand.

3.T

he No. of stitch settings P

SU

, PS

D and F

CT

are comm

on with the other settings.

Thus, w

hen using as the BT

specifications, the PS

U/P

SD

input and the function that

automatically low

ers the presser with a tim

er cannot be used.

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Run signal

S1Motor run

Sensor

Blow

er outputO

T1BT input

I*1BT output

OP

1

*2

*3

*4

*5 Middle

speed MFollowing this, B

Tspecifications operation

X(P

SU

)Y

(PS

D)

Z(FC

T)

BT specifications operation

O2M

=ON

O1B

=ON

CTL=O

N

Page 76: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 71 -

20. TABLE OF PROGRAM MODE FUNCTIONS

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

Setting

****

***

***

****

****

****

****

*

T

A

ON

OF

ON

OF

SH

SpecificationRef.page

P

mode

+

Maximum speed H.

Low speed L.

Thread trimming speed T.

Start tacking speed N.

End tacking speed V.

Medium speed M.

Slow start speed S.

No. of slow start stitches SLN.

Slow start operation mode SLM.

Slow start when power SLP.

is turned ON

One shot SH.

One shot operation mode SHM.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

3500

170

170

1200

1200

2000

170

0

T

OF

OF

SH

r/min

r/min

r/min

r/min

r/min

r/min

r/min

Stitches

0 to 8999

0 to 499

0 to 499

0 to 2999

0 to 2999

0 to 8999

0 to 2999

1 to 5

The maximum speed can be set.

The low speed can be set.

The thread trimming speed to reach the needle UP position stop from the needle DOWN position

during full heeling of when thread trimmer signal (S2) is turned ON can be set.

The speed of start tacking can be set.

The speed of end tacking can be set.

The medium speed can be set.

The slow start speed can be set.

The No. of slow start stitches can be set.

This is valid when the [B.SL] key is ON in the normal mode.

The slow start operation mode is selected. This is valid when the [B.SL] key is ON in the normal

mode.

Slow start operation will begin when the power is turned ON or when the first toe down after thread

trimming, or the first external run signal ÅiS0, S1Åjis turned ON.

Slow start operation will begin when the pedal is toed down or when the external run signal (S0, S1)

is turned ON.

Slow start operation will begin when the pedal is toed down for the first time after turning the power

ON, or when the first external run signal (S0, S1) is turned ON even if the [B, SL] key is turned OFF

in the normal mode.

The one shot function can be selected. One shot operation (automatic operation) will begin when the

external run signals (S0, S1, S4) is turned ON.

The one shot SH operation mode is selected.

This is valid when one shot SH is [ON].

When one of the external run signals (S0, S1, S4) is turned ON the sewing machine will rotate at the

commanded speed while ON, and will continue operating even when the signal is turned OFF.

However, the speed will be that commanded with the speed setting key ([C,<= =], [D, = =>] key)

while OFF. (When the automatic operation function is turned ON in the normal mode.) Stops with

PSD, PSU, ES or SEN signal.

****

***

***

****

****

****

****

*

CautionOperation validityO mark : The sewing machine can be operated in the function setting state.X mark : The sewing machine cannot be operated in the function setting state.Operate the sewing after returning to the normal mode.

Page 77: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 72 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

When one of the external run signals (S0,S1,S4) is turned ON, the sewing machine will rotate at the

speed commanded with each signal even if the signal is turned OFF.

The same operation as when [SS] is set is included. When one of the external run signals (S0,S1,S4)

is turned (1) OFF=>ON=> (2) OFF=>ON, the sewing machine will stop (1) and will restart at (2)

.(Alternate operation).

If the automatic operation function is OFF and the one shot signal (SH) is turned ON, the sewing

machine will run at the low speed.

If the lever connector variable speed command [VC] is input in this state, the sewing machine speed

will be approximately in proportion with the voltage.

The sewing machine will continue to run at the speed proportional to the variable speed command

[VC] even if the one shot signal (SH) is turned OFF in the normal mode. If the automatic operation

function is ON and the one shot signal (SH) is turned on, the sewing machine will run at the speed set

with the speed setting key ([C, <= =], [D,= =>] key).

The sewing machine will continue to run at the set speed even if the on shot signal (SH) is turned

OFF.

The sewing machine will run at the maximum speed [H] when the one shot signal (SH) is turned ON.

The sewing machine will continue to run at that speed even if the signal is turned OFF.

The sewing machine will run at the medium speed[M] when the one shot signal (SH) is turned ON.

The sewing machine will continue to run at that speed even if the signal is turned OFF.

The sewing machine will run at the low speed [L] when the one shot signal (SH) is turned ON. The

sewing machine will continue to run at that speed even if the signal is turned OFF.

When the one shot signal (SH) is turned OFF => (1) ON => OFF=> (2) ON=> OFF=> (3) ON=>OFF,

the same operation as the sewing machine speed is set to [RV] above is executed at (1).

The sewing machine will stop at (2) and will run at the same conditions as [RV] at (3).

(This operation is referred to as alternate operation hereafter.)

The alternate operation of [RH] is executed.

The alternate operation of [RM] is executed.

The alternate operation of [RL] is executed.

P

mode

+

One shot operation Mode SHM. O SH – – SS

SA

RV

RH

RM

RL

AV

AH

AM

AL

Page 78: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 73 -

The no. of stitches until stopping after the UP position priority stop signal PSU is input is set.

The no. of stitches until stopping after the DOWN position priority stop signal PSD is input is set.

After detecting the end of the fabric by a sensor with the PSU,PSD and SEN signals and stopping,

restarting is possible with the pedal toe down or external run signalÅiS0,S1Åjeven if the sensor does

not detect the fabric.

(even if PSU,PSD signals are ON).

Sensor input function “SEN” is valid. [SEN] have to be set on C mode.

(as same as the sensor key on control panel)

The number of stitch to stop, after the input function “SEN” ON.

(”SEN” have to be set “ON”)

This is the momentary function of the presser foot lifting.

The operation mode of the presser foot lift momentary mode is selected. This is valid when the

presser foot lift momentary FUM is set to [ON].

After thread trimming with full heeling or the external thread trimmer signal S2, the presser foot lifting

operation is continued.

After thread trimming with full heeling or the external thread trimmer signal S2, the presser foot lifting

operation is continued while the timer is on,and then the presser foot will lower. The timer time is set

with the timer setting FCT.

The presser foot lifting operation is activated with full heeling, light heeling, or the external control

signal (S2,F) ON.

Then, when the full heeling, light heeling or external control signal (S2,F) is turned ON, the presser

foot will bring down, and when turned ON again, the presser foot will lift. (Alternate operation.)

The timer operates in the manner as the [C] setting.

However, after the presser foot bring down, the same alternate operation as the [A] setting will occur.

The timer time for the presser foot output to turn ON and then turn OFF when the mode P FUM

operation mode FU is set to [C], [T] can be set.

The time for the motor to start driving after the presser foot output FU is turned OFF when pedal toe

down or external run signal (S0,S1) ON during presser foot lifting can be set in 2 millisecond units.

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

P

mode

+

No. of stitches after PSU.

PSU input

No. of stitches after PSD.

PSD input

Restart after PSD, PSU PSN.

input PSN

Input sensor function SEN.

valid/invalid

Setting stitch amount SE.

to stop by “SEN”

Presser foot lift FUM.

momentary

FUM operation mode FU.

Time setting for FUM FCT.

operation mode

(FU is set to [C],[T])

Time to motor drive FD.

after presser foot lifter

bring down

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

0

0

OF

OF

0

ON

M

I2

I76

Stitches

Stitches

Stitches

sec

msec

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

1 to 99

0 to 998

**

**

**

**

***

**

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

ON

OF

M

C

A

T

**

***

Page 79: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 74 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification

Ref.page

The full wave time of the presser foot lifter output during [FU] operation can be set.

[20] : Full wave time 200 mS

[25] : Full wave time 250 mS

[30] : Full wave time 300 mS

[40] : Full wave time 400 mS

[50] : Full wave time 500 mS

[60] : Full wave time 600 mS

[80] : Full wave time 800 mS

[100] : Full wave time 1 sec.

The delay time for the presser foot output FU to turn ON when the light heeling (lever signal presser

foot lifting signal S3) is input before thread trimming can be set.

The chopping output duty during holding after the presser foot lifting output FU presser foot lifting

operation can be set.

Set to [MS] : 4 msON/OFF, 50 %duty

Set to [MF] : 2 msON/OFF, 50 %duty

Set to [HI] : 4 msON,2 msOFF, 50 %duty

Set to [FL] : 100 % (full wave)

Set to [LO] : 2 msON, 4 msOFF, 33 % duty

The presser foot lifting operation begins when power is turned ON.

This is valid when the FUM function is set to [ON]. When FU is set to [C] or [T], the presser foot will

lift only while the timer is ON.

The presser foot lifting operation after thread trimming with full heeling or the external thread trimmer

signal S2 is prohibited.

However, the presser foot lifting is carried out with the presser foot lifting signal F or light heeling.

The presser foot lifting operation with light heeling is prohibited.

The presser foot operation is carried out with full heeling or the presser foot lifting signal F.

The thread trimming operation and subsequent presser foot lifting operation with full heeling or

external thread trimmer signal S2 is prohibited.

The operation can be changed when the thread trimming protection signal (S6) is turned Short/

Open.

The sewing machine will stop when the input signal (S6) is Open.

The sewing machine will stop when the input signal (S6)is Short.

P

mode

+

Full wave time of presser FO.

foot lifter output

Delay time of presser S3D.

foot signal S3 input

Presser foot lifting FUD.

output chopping duty

Presser foot lifting PFU.

output when power is turned ON

Cancel the presser FL.

foot lifting with full heeling

Cancel presser foot lifting S3L.

with light heeling

Cancel of thread S2L.

trimming operation

Thread trimming protection S6L.

signal (S6) logical changeover

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

X

50

I0

MF

OF

OF

OF

OF

LO

X10

msec

X10

msec

1 to 99

20

25

30

40

50

60

80

100

**

MS

MF

HI

FL

LO

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

HI

LO

**

Page 80: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 75 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

Setting Ref.page

Specification

Automatic operation (standing operation) can be set.

The thread trimming operation with full heeling of the pedal or with the thread trimming signal S2 is

not performed, and instead needle UP position stop will occur.

Auto-stop of preset stitch sewing before thread trimming.

And then it is free sewing till thread trimming.

The motor is reverse run after thread trimming, and the needle will stop near the needle bar top dead

point.

The reverse run angle from the UP position after thread trimming can be set for when the reverse run

needle lifting after thread trimming RU is set to ON. The setting angle is in two degree intervals.

The thread is trimmed with reverse feed by driving the backstitch solenoid simultaneously with the

thread trimmer solenoid.

Thread trimming is canceled with reverse feed of end N or W tacking when TB function is set to ON.

The operation mode of full heeling or external thread trimmer signal S2 is selected. This is valid when

cancel of thread trimming operation S2L is set to [OF].

With full heeling or the external thread trimmer signal S2 after the needle UP postion stop, the motor

will rotate once to trim the thread. Then the presser foot will lift.

When stopped at the needle DOWN position, the motor will make a half-rotation and then the

presser foot will lift.

The needle will remain at the UP position even when full heeling or external thread trimmer signal S2

is turned ON after stopping at the UP position. Only the presser foot lifting operation will operate after

this.

When full heeling or external thread trimming signal S2 is input after the needle DOWN position

stop,motor will make a half-rotation and trim the thread. Only the foot lifting operation will operate

after this.

P

mode

+

Automatic operation AT.

Thread trimmer cancel TL.

Auto-stop of preset TLS.

stitch sewing before trim

Reverse run needle lifting RU.

after thread trimming

RU reverse run angle R8.

Thread trimming with TB.

reverse feed

Cancel of TB function TBJ

at the time of end N or W tacking

Full heeling, S2 signal S2R.

operation mode

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

ON

60

OF

ON

ON

Degree

0 to 360

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

Page 81: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 76 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

This releases the restart operation prohibit command during thread trimming.

Restart is possible for a designated time after the pedal toe down or external operation signal (S0,S1) is turned ON immediately after full pedal heeling. This is used with a sewing machine that doesnot have thread trimming.Restart is not possible. Restart is possible if the pedal toe down or external run signal (S0,S1) isturned ON again after a set time is passed.The thread trimming timing for each manufacturer’s thread trimming sewing machine can be set.

Not used.For free setting of the thread trimming.Not thread trimming sewing machine.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Standard–Not usedNot used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.Not used.The thread is trimmed by reverse running the motor at the set angle from the DOWN position with fullheeling or the thread trimmer signal S2. The set angle can be adjusted with the reverse run angle K8from the DOWN position to the UP position. This can be used for blind stitch sewing machine.

Pmode

+

Cancel of interlock after full IL.pedal heeling

Thread trimming mode TR.

O

O

OF

J1

ON

OF

M1PRG

NOKA1KA2KA3KA4KA5KA6KA7KA8KB1KB2KB3KB4

B1D1J1J2N1P1P2P3P4T1T2K

RK

Needle DOWNposition DN

Needle UPposition UP

Thread trimmingposition TM

ON

ON

ON

Thread trimmer signal S2

S8 E8

Adjust the thread trimming position TM signal’s ON starting angle S8,and ON angle E8. (The factory setting is 50 for S8, and 90 for E8.)

CautionThe thread trimming timing for each thread trimming sewing machine can be setin the thread trimming mode TR, but the speed, etc., cannot be set. These mustbe set separately. When set to [D1], set the lifting output chopping duty FUD inthe B mode to [LO] 33 % duty.

––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

Page 82: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 77 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification

Ref.page

The needle will stop in the UP position after thread trimming, during neutral after pedal toe down or

when external run signal (S0,S1) is turned OFF.

When 1 position is set with the [A,1-2] key in the normal mode, the needle will lift to the UP position

if not in the UP position when the power is turned ON.

When 2 position is set with the [A,1-2] key in the normal mode, the needle will lift to the UP position

if not in the UP position when the power is turned ON.

The needle stop position angle can be set just above the fabric looking from the UP position when

the input signal is set the [BC] or [BCR].

(The setting angle is in 2 degree intervals.)

The coasting angle at the needle DOWN position stop can be set.

(The setting angle is in 2 degree intervals.)

The coasting angle at the needle UP position stop can be set.

(The setting angle is in 2 degree intervals.)

The reverse run angle from the DOWN position to the UP position can be set when the S0 operation

mode [USR] or reverse thread trimming mode operation mode TR [RK] is set in mode P.

The width of virtual signal “TM”.:

When [TR] = [B1] or [T2], it is possible to use this function.

The start angle of virtual signal “TM”.:

When [TR]= [B1] or [T2], it is possible to use this function.

Input “SEN” is always valid.

Input “SEN” is only valid, when setting pattern is free sewing.

Sewing machine run without down signal. The angle between up and down position is set to “K8”.

The width is set at 60 degree automatically.

It set the up and down signal width to 60 degree automatically.

P

mode

+

Thread trimming validity POS.

at neutral pedal

Operation when power is P1P.

turned ON during 1 position setting

Operation when power is P2P.

turned ON during 2 position setting

Needle stop position C8.

before fabric

Needle DOWN position D8.

stop angle

Needle UP position U8.

stop angle

Reverse run angle from K8.

DOWN position to UP position

ON angle of virtual TM E8.

ON start angle of virtual TM S8.

Setting sensor “SEN” SNM.

input function

Virtual down Setting KD.

Virtual width of up and KDU.

down signal

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

60

32

10

180

90

50

ON

OF

OF

Degree

Degree

Degree

Degree

Degree

Degree

0 to 360

10 to 180

10 to 180

0 to 360

0 to 360

0 to 360

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

**

**

***

***

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

**

**

***

***

***

Page 83: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 78 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

The high/low gain can be set. Set with the following according to the sewing machine being used.

Sewing machine with large inertia.

Sewing machine with small inertia.

This is used when there is a slight vibration when stopping even when the gain is set to [L].

The size of the curve of the speed changes for the pedal toe down amount can be set. The speed

change curve will change from small to large according to the small => large of the set value.

The time for the sewing machine to reach the high speed after the pedal toe down or external run

signal (S1) is input can be set easily.

[H] : 100 mS

[M] : 140 mS

[L] : 240 mS

[–] : The time set in the next acceleration time ACT is used.

The acceleration time for the sewing machine to reach the high speed after pedal toe down or

external run signal (S1) ON can be set. This is valid when the acceleration time simple setting AC is

set to [–].

The deceleration time for the sewing machine to stop after returning to neutral from pedal toe down

or when the external run signalÅiS1Åjis turned OFF can be set easily.

[H] : 90 mS

[M] : 160 mS

[L] : 230 mS

[–] : The time set in the next deceleration time DCT is used.

A

mode

+

A

1-2

Gain high/low selection GA.

Pedal curve PDC.

Acceleration time AC.

simple setting

Acceleration time ACT.

Deceleration time DC.

simple setting

O

O

O

O

O

H

30

M

14

M

x10

msec

10 to 99

6 to 99

H

L

LL

**

H

M

L

**

H

M

L

**

**

SpeedSet value-Large

Factory setting[30]

Set value-Small

Pedal toe down

Page 84: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 79 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

The deceleration time for the sewing machine to stop after returning to neutral from pedal toe down

or when the external run signal (S1) is turned OFF can be set. This is valid when the deceleration

time simple setting DC is set to [–].

Normally use this at 350 milliseconds or less.

The speed change curve is accelerated slowly for the t time after pedal toe down or the external run

signal (S1) is turned ON, and then the sewing machine accelerates rapidly and enters the high

speed operation.

This is effective when carrying out one stitch sewing with the external run signal (S1) when automatic

operation function is set in the P mode.

The “t” time can set when S-character cushion is set to [ON].

The operation mode of the full heeling or S2 signal when the power is turned on or after thread

trimming is determined.

The presser foot lifting operation is entered.

The needle lifting operation is entered.

No operation.

The presser foot lifting operation after needle lifting is entered.

The speed setting is set so that the normal sewing machine shaft speed is constant, but by the [ON]

setting, it is possible to operate at the value which was set by the [MR], [SR] function.

This is effective when the motor pulley diameter is small, the V belt slips and the sewing machine

speed is unstable.

Set the diameter of motor pulley

When “PL” is “ON”, this function is valid.

Set the diameter of sewing machine pulley

When “PL” is “ON”, this function is valid.

A

mode

+

A

1-2

Deceleration time DCT.

S-character cushion SC.

S-character cushion SCT.

time setting

Full heeling S2 signal S2M.

operation mode when power

is turned on or after thread

trimming

Sewing machine shaft/ PL.

motor shaft speed

setting selection

Setting motor pulley MR.

diameter

Setting sewing machine SR.

pulley diameter

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

I6

OF

7

FU

OF

70

70

x10

msec

x10

msec

mm

mm

6 to 99

0 to 99

20 to 349

20 to 349

**

ON

OF

**

FU

U

NO

UF

ON

OF

***

***

Time

**

**

***

***

Speed

t

CautionThe factory setting [I6] refers to [I6x10 milliseconds=160 milliseconds].

Page 85: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 80 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Variable operation is possible when the detector has broken by setting to [ON] to invalidate the

detector. The positioning stop and thread trimming operations will not be possible.

The motor’s maximum speed can be set.

Set to [36]:3600 r/min

Not used

When machine will be stop,first priority become speed control

(Usually first priority to stop is stop angle.)

The brake time for stopping the sewing machine can be set.

Setting the angle to clear weak break.

Minimum setting angle is 0.2 degree.

Reducing the sound (noise) of weak brake.

The weak brake force can be set.

The weak brake force can be set for when stopping the sewing machine when the weak brake [BK]

is set to [ON].

Set to [E] : Brake that allows manual rotation.

Set to [H] : Strong brake

The weak brake validity can be set.

A

mode

+

A

1-2

No detector mode NOS.

Motor maximum speed MSP.

First priority stop => STM.

speed contro

Brake time BKT.

Weak brake angle B8.

Reduction of weak BNR.

brake sound

Weak brake force BKS.

Weak brake mode BKM.

Weak brake BK.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

36

OF

14

14

ON

99

E

OF

x100

r/min

x10

msec

x0.1

Degree

%

0 to 99

4 to 500

0 to 99

ON

OF

36

40

ON

OF

**

***

ON

OF

**

E

H

ON

OF

**

***

**

CautionThe factory setting [I4] refers to[I4x0.1 degree=1.4 degree].

Page 86: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 81 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Display the round per minute of running sewing machine.

Setting the number of down counter.

Display the number of current down counter.

Setting the number of up counter.

Display the number of current up counter.

Selection of count up condition.

After thread trimming is finished.

The number of sewing stitch become “N”

(”N” have to be set at “CNU”)

The number of trimming times become “N”

(”N” have to be set at “PRN”)

When output signal “O1” become ON.

(”IO1” have to be set to input signal on the program mode C.)

When output signal “O1” become ON.

(”O1” have to be set to output function on “O1” of the program mode C.)

Selection of operation count over.(Up counter)

Control panel buzzes and running is prohibited after trimming with buzzer sound. And then when

counter clear key “CCL” is pressed, sewing become possible. (Buzzer will stop after a while.)

(Factory is possible to continue without buzzer sound.)

Sewing is possible to continue without buzzer sound.

Sewing is possible to continue with buzzer sound.

(Buzzer will stop after a while.)

When sewing pattern is changed, it clear “up counter”. (UCM=ON)

The up counter is valid. (UPC=ON)

B

mode

+

B

SL

Display sewing speed S.

Down counter setting N.

count amount

Down counter display D.

count amount

Up counter setting P.

count amount

Up counter display U.

count amount

Up counter the selection CUP.

of setting mode

Up counter the selection USC.

of counter operation

Up counter changing UCM.

sewing pattern

Up counter valid/invalid UPC.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

99

99

99

0

CU

ST

OF

OF

r/min

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

****

****

****

****

****

CU

ST

PR

IN

OU

ST

OF

BZ

ON

OF

ON

OF

****

****

****

****

****

Page 87: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 82 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Bmode

+B

SL

The UP counter operation, after counting over.

(it is valid, when [USC] is set to “OF,”BZ”.)

The display shows the setting number and the counting is stopped.

The display shows setting number and the counting is continued.

Selection of count condition.

After thread trimming is finished.

The number of sewing stitch become “N”

(”N” have to be set at “CNU”)

The number of trimming times become “N”

(”N” have to be set at “PRN”)

When input signal “O1” become ON.

(”IO1” have to be set to input signal on the program mode C.)

When output signal “O1” become ON.

(”O1” have to be set to output function on “O1” of the program mode C.)

Selection of operation at count over. (Down counter)

Control panel buzzes and running is prohibited after thread trimming with buzzer sound. And then

when counter clear key “CCL” is pressed, buzzer and sewing become possible. (Buzzer will stop

after a while.)

(Factory is setting of counter clear key is “P” key on control panel.)

Sewing is possible to continue without buzzer sound.

Sewing is possible to continue with buzzer sound.

(Buzzer will stop after a while.)

When sewing pattern is changed, it clear “down counter”. (DCM=ON)

The down counter is valid. (DNC=ON)

The down counter action, after counting over.

(It is valid, when [DSC] is set to “OF”, ”BZ”.)

The display shows “0” and the counting is stopped.

The display shows “–“ and the counting is continued.

Up counter operation NXU.

after counting over

Down counter CDN.

the selection of setting mode

Down counter DSC.

the selection of counter operation

Down counter changing DCM.

sewing pattern

Down counter DNC.

valid/invalid

Down counter operation NXD.

after counting over

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

CU

ST

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

CU

ST

PR

IN

OU

ST

OF

BZ

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Page 88: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 83 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification

Ref.page

Bmode

+B

SL

When power switch is turned on,

Up counter is clear (zero) and down counter is set the setting number.

Both counter keep previous amount.

When “CUP” and “CDN” are PR, trimming times “N” is set.

When “CUP” and “CDN” are ST, number of stitch “N” is set.

Modification of count amount.

When input function “IO1” is turn on, it become count up.

When input function “IO2” is turn on, it become count down.

(Input function can set input signal on program mode “C”.)

Modification is prohibited.

Selection display mode, when power switch is turned on.

When power switch turn on, display shows previous condition.

(Keep previous condition)

When power switch turn on, display shows normal mode.

Counter condition turning PCM.

on power switch

Setting Thread trimming PRN.

times “N”

Setting Number of CNU.

stitches “N”

Count modification CCI.

(to use IO1,IO2)

Display condition turning PMD.

on power switch

O

O

O

O

O

OF

0

1

OF

OF

times

stitches

0 to 99

1 to 99

ON

OF

**

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

Page 89: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 84 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

Selection of input

signal function I1. to I7.

IA. to IP.

X – – – ****** The input functions of each signal I1 to I4 and IA to IP can be selected from 60 types of functions.

1. Refer to the C mode input signal setting table of the pages 126 to 131.

2. Refer to the Conception figure of input and output customization of the page 132 to 134.

CautionInput signal I3 is not available.Set CPK to ON when using the input signal I6.Set CKK to ON when using the input signal IC.

CautionTable of each input signal and connector pin connection and factory setting correspondenceInput signal[IP] is [CCL] hey on control panel.

Input signal IA IB IC ID IE

Factory setting PSU PSD S0 TL S7

Input signal IF IG IH II

Factory setting F S1 S2 S3

Input signal I1 I2 I4 I5 I6 I7

Factory setting IO1 IO1 NO NO F BTL

CautionInput signals [14, 15, 16, 17] are dual port ofinput and output.So when these input signals will be used,output functions of O4, O5, O6 and O7 haveto be set to “NO”.

321

654

987

121110

151413

147

136

125

114

103

92

81

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6II

IG

IH

(Lever connector)IG : S1 (Variable speed run signal)IH : S2 (Thread trimmer signal)II : S3 (Presser foot lifter signal)

IB

IA

IC

(Option A connector)IA : PSU (Needle UP position priority stop signal)IB : PSD (Needle DOWN position priority stop signal)IC : S0 (Low speed run signal)

I5

I4

I1

I2

I6

I7

(Option B connector)I1 : 1O1 (Signal output to virtual output 1)I2 : 1O1 (Signal output to virtual output 1)I4 : NO (No setting)I5 : NO (No setting)I6 : F (Presser foot lifter signal)I7 : BTL (Start/end tacking cancel signal)(Sewing machine connector)

ID : TL (Thread trimmer cancel signal)

IE : S7 (Backstitching during run signal)

IF : F (Presser foot lifter signal)

Page 90: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 85 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

The input logic of each Input signal I1 to I7 and IA to IP is reversed.

If each input signal I4 to I7 and IA to IP performs OFF =>(1) ON=>OFF=>(2) ON=>OFF=>(3)

ON=>OFF the signal will stay ON at (1),stop (turn OFF) at (2), and will turn ON again at (3). (iThis is

hereafter referred to alternate operation.)

The operation mode of each input signal I1 and I2 can be selected.

Normal operation

Alternating operation.

RS F/F (Flip-Flop) operation.

When sewing machine is running, input signal[I1] is not accepted

This function is valid, only [I1M] set [AL] or [RS].

When [I1M] set [AL] on program mode “C”, the alternate operation of input [I1] sets virtual output

[OT3] to alternative output.

F/F (Flip Flop) operation of input signal [I1] and [I2] is cleared by thread trimming operation.

When above setting (I1C,I2C) is valid, these delay timer is set.

The input signal I1 virtual F/F (flip-flop) operation is tuned ON when power is turned ON.

It is only valid, when [I1M] function is set to “AL” or “RS”.

The input signal I1 virtual F/F (flip-flop) operation is turned OFF when the sewing start No. of stitches

RLN setting is completed.

The input signal I1 virtual F/F (flip-flop) operation is turned ON when the tacking starts or after thread

trimming.

Input signal logical changeover

function

I1L. to I7L.

IAL. to IPL.

Input signal alternating operation

I4A. to I7A.

IAA. to IPA.

Setting the function for I1 and I2

I1M. to I2M.

Special setting for input signal “I1”

(Neglecting of signal) I1O.

Special setting for input I1F.

signal “I1” is ON

RS F/F clear setting I1C. to I2C.

RS F/F delay time setting

1CT. to 2CT.

Input signal I1 virtual F1P.

F/F circuit operation 1

Input signal I1 virtual F/F F1C.

circuit operation 2

Input signal I1 virtual F/F F1S.

circuit operation 3

X

X

X

O

X

X

O

X

X

X

OF

OF

AL

OF

OF

OF

0

OF

OF

OF

x100

msec

0 to 99

ON

OF

ON

OF

NO

AL

RS

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

CautionThe function I3L is not available.Set CPK to ON when using the function I6L.

CautionSet CPK to ON when using the function I6A.

Page 91: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 86 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

Set condition RS F/F of I1 and I2

When [I1M] and [I2M] is set to [RS], it is valid.

RS F/F of I1 is set by I1, RS F/F of I2 is set by I2.

After thread trimming operation (stop to up position.)

When motor start, RS F/F will be set.

When motor stop, RS F/F will be set.

When sewing start, after thread trimming.

When start tacking or condensed stitch was finished.

(When condensed stitch is not set, it is invalid)

Reset condition RS F/F of I1 and I2

When [I1M] and [I2M] is set to [RS], it is valid.

RS F/F of I1 is reset by I6, RS F/F of I2 is reset by 17.

When thread trimming is done (stop to up position.)

When motor start, RS F/F will be reset.

When motor stop, RS F/F will be reset.

When sewing start, after trimming.

When start condensed stitch was finished.

(When condensed stitch is not set, it is invalid.)

When sewing machine sew the setting stitch after set RS F/F, it will be reset. (R1N, R2N)

When [R1R] or [R2] set [NC], the number of stitch is set by this counter.

The output functions of each output signal OA to OD,OF,OJ to OK and O1 to O7 can be selected

from 37 types of functions.

1. Refer to the C mode input signal setting table of the pages I68 to I71.

2. Refer to the Conception figure of input and output customization of the page I74 to I76.

Set condition of RS F/F

for I1 and I2

R1S. to R2S.

Reset condition of RS F/F

for I1 and I2

R1R. to R2R.

RS F/F reset stitch amount

for I1 and I2

R1N. to R2N.

Selection of output signal function

OA. to OD.

OF.

O1. to O7.

OJ. to OK.

X

X

O

X

IN

IN

3

*

Stitches

0 to 99

IN

T

R

S

TR

SB

IN

T

R

S

TR

SB

NC

**

***

**

***

CautionOutput signal OE is not available.Set CPK to ON when using the function O6.

Page 92: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 87 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

The output functions of each output signal OO to OP can be selected from 37 types of functions.

1. Refer to the C mode input signal setting table of the pages 126 to 131.

2. Refer to the Conception figure of input and output customization of the page 132 to 134.

The output logic of each output signal OA to OD, OF and O1 to O7 is reversed.

Selection of output signal function

OO. to OP.

Output signal logical

changeover function

OAL. to ODL.

OFL.

O1L. to O7L.

X

X

*

OF

***

ON

OF

***

(Option B connector)O1 : OT1 (Virtual output)O2 : NCL (Needle cooler output)O3 : TF (TF output)O4 : NO (No setting)O5 : NO (No setting)O6 : NO (No setting)O7 : NO (No setting)

CautionTable of each output signal and connector pin connection and factory setting correspondence.

Output signal OA OB OC OD OF

Factory setting T W B L FU

Output signal O1 O2 O3 O4

Factory setting OT1 NCL TF NO

Output signal O5 O6 O7

Factory setting NO NO NO

CautionOutput[O4,O5,O6,O7] are not solenoid output signal.Also these signal are dual port of input and output.So when these output signal will be used, input signal haveto be set to “OF”.

7 14

6 13

5 12

4 11

3 10

2 9

1 8

3

6

9

2

5

8

1

4

7

121110

151413

1

2

3

4

OF (Presser foot lifter connector)OF : FU (Presser foot lifter output)

OB

OA

OD

OC

(Sewing machine connector)OA : T (Thread trimmer output)OB : W (Wiper output)OC : B (Backstitch output)OD : L (Thread release output)

O4

O5

O7

O6

O1

O2

O3

Page 93: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 88 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

The output logic of each output signal OJ to OK, and OO to OP is reversed.

Each output is output with full wave immediately after output starts, and then is reduced to half-wave

output for each output signal OA to OD and O1 to O3. (Chopping control)

The full wave output time can be set with the full wave time [PO] function for each output.

In each output signal OA to OD, OJ to OK, OO to OP and O1 to O7, each output is forcibly turned

OFF after the time set in the OFF timer is passed.

The OFF timer set time can be set with each output’s forced OFF timer [OTT] function.

In each output signal OA to OD and OF the delay time to when each output is started can be set.

Each delay time can be set in 20ms intervals.

Output signal logical

changeover function

OJL. to OKL.

OOL. to OPL.

Output chopping function

OAC. to ODC.

O1C. to O3C.

Output signal forced

OFF function

OAT. to ODT.

O1T. to O7T.

OJT. to OKT.

OOT. to OPT.

Output signal delay

time setting function

DA. to DD.

DF.

X

X

X

X

OF

OF

OF

0

x20

msec

0 to 08

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

******

CautionOutput signal [O4, O5, O6, O7] are chopping function is not available.

Page 94: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 89 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

In each output signal OJ to OK, OO to OP and O1 to O7, the delay time to when each output is

started can be set.

Each delay time can be set in 2 ms intervals.

The chopping output duty during holding after the presser foot lifter output FU lifting operation can be

set.

Set to [MS] : 4 ms ON/OFF 50 %duty

Set to [MF] : 2 ms ON/OFF 50 %duty

Set to [HI] : 4 ms ON, 2 ms OFF, 66 %duty

Set to [FL] : 100 % (full wave)

Set to [LO] : 2 ms ON,4 ms OFF 33 %duty

The full wave output time of the presser foot lifter output FU can be set.

Set to [20] : 200 ms

Set to [25] : 250 ms

Set to [30] : 300 ms

Set to [40] : 400 ms

Set to [50] : 500 ms

Set to [60] : 600 ms

Set to [80] : 800 ms

Set to [100] : 1000 ms

The operation mode of presser foot lifter momentary FUM is set. This is valid when presser foot lifter

momentary FUM is set to [ON] in the P mode.

The presser foot lifter operation is continued after full heeling or after thread trimmer with external

thread trimmer signal S2.

The presser foot lifter operation is continued during the timer time after full heeling or after thread

trimming with external thread trimmer signal S2. Then the presser foot lifter is lowered.

The timer can be adjusted with timer setting FCT in the P mode.

Output signal delay time

setting function

D1. to D7.

DJ. to DK.

DO. to DP.

Presser foot lifter output FUD.

chopping duty

Presser foot lifter FU full FO.

wave output time

Presser foot lifter FU FU.

momentary mode

X

X

X

X

D1=10

MF

50

M

msec

x10

msec

***

MS

MF

HI

FL

LO

20

25

30

40

50

60

80

100

M

C

***0 to 510

Page 95: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 90 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

The presser foot lifter operates with full heeling or when the external signal (S2, F) turns ON, and

then the presser foot lifter.

Lower when full heeling, light heeling or external signal (S2,F) turns on.

The presser foot lifter will rise if these signal is turned ON again.

(Alternate operation)

The timer operates in the same manner as [C] setting. However, after the presser foot lifter lowers,

the operation will be alternate as with the [A] setting.

The full wave output time of each output signal OA to OD and O1 to O7 can be set.

Set to [20] : 200 ms

Set to [25] : 250 ms

Set to [30] : 300 ms

Set to [40] : 400 ms

Set to [50] : 500 ms

Set to [60] : 600 ms

Set to [80] : 800 ms

Set to [100] : 1000 ms

Setting output chopping duty, except FU output.

Set to [MS] : 4ms ON/OFF 50%.

Set to [MF] : 2ms ON/OFF 50%.

Set to [HI] : 4ms ON, 2ms OFF, 66% duty.

Set to [LO] : 2ms ON, 4ms OFF, 33% duty.

The timer that forcibly turns off output signals OA to OD and O1 to O7 can be set.

The timer from the time when the presser foot lifter output is turned ON to the time when it is turned

OFF.

(when FUM operation mode FU [C] or[T] is set can be set.)

Select input function to the logic input [AND].

Input function is select on “Input/output function for signal on C mode setting” (pages 126 to 131)

Refer to “ The composition figure of input and output customization” about [AND] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[AND] input logic is set to opposite

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [AND] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[AND] input is set to alternative.

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [AND] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

Presser foot lifter FU FU.

momentary mode

Full wave output time PO.

for each output

Output chopping duty POD.

except of FU output

Forced OFF timer setting OTT.

function for each output

FUM operation mode FCT.

timer setting function

Logic [AND] input/selecting AN.

input function

Logic[AND] input setting ANL.

Hi / Low logic

Logic[AND] input ANA.

Alternate

X

O

O

O

O

X

X

X

M

50

MF

12

12

NO

OF

OF

x10

msec

sec

sec

1 to 24

1 to 99

A

T

20

25

30

40

50

60

80

100

MS

MF

HI

LO

**

**

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

***

Page 96: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 91 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

Select output function of [AND 1/2/3]

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [AND] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[AND 1/2/3] output logic is set to opposite

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [AND] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

Select input function to logic input [OR]

Input function is select on “Input/output function for signal on C mode setting” (pages 126 to 131)

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [OR] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[OR] input logic is set to opposite.

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [OR] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[OR] input logic is set to Alternate.

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [OR] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

Select output function of [OR 1/2/3]

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [OR] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

[OR 1/2/3] output logic is set to opposite.

Refer to “The composition figure of input and output customization” about [OR] setting. (Pages 132

to 134)

Set variable speed command for digital input. (I1, I2, I6, I7)

High speed is set to [H] on program mode “P”. (CSP=ON.CSG=OFF)

Set variable speed command for digital input. (I1, I2, I6, I7)

High speed is set to [H] on program mode “P”.

To use gray code. (3, 2, 1, 0)= (I6, I7, I2, I1). (CSP=ON, CSG=ON)

Thread release output L will turn ON even while backstitch output B is ON.

Virtual outputs OT1 to OT3 will be turned OFF forcibly after the OFF timer set time has passed.

The OFF timer set time can be set with the virtual output OFF timer setting function [T1T to T3T].

Logic [AND 1/2/3] output

selecting output function

N1. to N3.

Logic [AND 1/2/3] output

setting of Hi/Low logic

N1L. to N3L.

Logic[OR] input selecting

input function

OR.

Logic [OR] input setting

of Hi/Low logic

ORL.

Logic[OR] input Alternate

ORA.

Logic [OR 1/2/3] output

selecting output function

R1. to R3.

Logic[OR 1/2/3] output

setting of Hi/Low logic

R1L. to R3L.

Variable speed command

for digital input CSP.

Variable speed command

for digital input

(Gray code) CSG.

Thread release +

backstitch output LB.

Virtual output (OT1 to OT3)

forced OFF function

T1C. to T3C.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

O

O

HI

OF

NO

OF

OF

NO

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

***

ON

OF

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

***

Page 97: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 92 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Cmode

+C

The timer time for forcibly turning OFF virtual outputs OT1 to OT3 can be set.

Feed pulse [CP] is invalid.

When feed pulse will be used, set this function to “CF”

This signal output is from the same pin of “I6” and “O6”.

Setting the number of pulse [CP]. After changing this number, turn on power switch again.

The prohibited angle section of pulse generated can be set from UP position.

The prohibited angle of pulse generated is 60 degree from the setting position (angle).

Panel switch operation ([M], [A,1-2], [B,SL], [C,<= =]. [D,= =>] key operations)

during the normal mode, tacking mode and pattern mode will not be possible.

However, changeover into each mode will be possible.

Output signal “CKD” is prohibited during backtack term.

Output signal “CP” is prohibited during backtack term.

Output signal “CKD” is prohibited.

Selection F key function.

Display Up counter amount

Display Down counter amount

Display stitch amount of sensor

Display routine speed of sewing machine.

Forced OFF timer setting

function for virtual outputs

(OT1 to OT3) T1T. to T3T.

Feed pulse output (CP) CPK.

cancel function

Setting CP pulse amount CP.

Prohibited angle of CPC.

output CP pulse

Panel switch PSW.

operation prohibit

CKD output cancel CKB.

during backtack trem

CP output cancel during CPB.

backtack term

CKD output cancel CKK.

F key function CNF.

on control panel

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

99

ON

32

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

SE

x10

msec

0 to 99

1 to 99

**

ON

OF

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

UP

DN

SE

SP

**

**

Page 98: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 93 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

The operation mode during tacking is determined.

During start tacking, even if the pedal is returned to neutral or the external run signal (S1) is turned

OFF, the stitching will continue to the last tack process, and then will stop.

Stitching will continue in the same manner for end tacking, and the needle will be lifted after thread

trimming.

The tacking speed will change according to the pedal toe down amount only during start tacking.

(the maximum speed is the start tacking speed N.)

The sewing machine will stop if the pedal is returned to neutral or external signal turned OFF during

start tacking.

The sewing machine will stop for a set time at each tack corner even with pedal toe down or if the

external run signal (S1) is ON.

The stop time can be adjusted with [CT].

This is used to accurately tack.

The sewing machine will stop for a set time at each tack corner even with pedal toe down or if the

external run signal (S1) is ON.

The sewing machine stops at the UP position irrespective of the position.

The stop time can be adjusted with [CT].

This is used to accurately tack.

The sewing machine will stop for a set time at each tack corner even with pedal toe down or if the

external run signal (S1) is ON.

The sewing machine stops at the DOWN position irrespective of the position.

The stop time can be adjusted with [CT].

This is used to accurately tack.

Operation mode D1.

during tackingO M – –

M

D

C S T

C S U

CSD

Temporarystop

Temporarystop

CautionSet the start and end tack type, and number of stitches in the tacking modebefore setting the functions in the D mode.

Temporary stop

Page 99: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 94 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

The operation mode during the completion of start tack is determined.

If the pedal is toed down or the external run signals (S0, S1) are ON when start tacking is completed,

the next straight line stitching will begin.

Even if the pedal is toed down or the external run signals (S1) turned ON when start tacking is

completed, the sewing machine will stop.

The next straight line stitching will start when the pedal is toed down for neutral again, or when the

external run signals (S1) is turned OFF to ON.

The thread is trimmed when start tacking is completed. This is used for continuous tack stitch.

The stop time at each corner during tacking can be set when [CST] in operation mode D1 is set.[CSU],

[CSD]

The backstitch solenoid operation timing can be set to align the tacking.

Set to [ON] : Tacking speed less than 1000 rotations.

Set to [OFF] : Tacking speed 1000 rotations or more.

By finely adjusting the backstitch solenoid operation timing of start tacking from forward to reverse,

the no. of stitches can be compensated.

The relation of the setting value and no. of stitch compensation is as shown below.

By finely adjusting the backstitch solenoid operation timing of start tacking from forward to reverse,

the no. of stitches can be compensated.

The relation of the setting value and no. of stitch compensation is as shown below.

By finely adjusting the backstitch solenoid operation timing of start tacking from reverse to forward,

the no. of stitches can be compensated.

The relation of the setting value and no. of stitch compensation is as shown below.

Operation mode during D2.

start tack completion

Stop time at each corner CT.

during start and backtacking

Tack alignment BM.

No. of stitch compensation BT1.

for start tacking alignment

No. of stitch compensation BT2.

for start tacking alignment

No. of stitch compensation BT3.

for start tacking alignment

O

O

O

O

O

O

CON

5

OF

C

2

5

x10

msec

0 to 99

0 to F

0 to F

0 to F

CON

STP

TRM

**

ON

OF

*

*

*

**

*

*

*

CautionIf the operation mode during tacking D1 is set ti [CST], [CSU] and [CSD], thetacking alignment functions BM, BT1, BT2, BT3 and BT4 will be invalid.

Page 100: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 95 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

By finely adjusting the backstitch solenoid operation timing of end tacking from forward to reverse,

the no. of stitches can be compensated. The relation of the setting value and no. of stitch compensation

is as shown below.

15 stitches are added to the set No. of start and end tacking stitches.

For example, if the set No. of start tacking stitches is 4 stitches, the actual No. of start tacking stitches

will be 19 stitches (4+15).

[BTO] setting stitches are added to the set No. of start and end tacking stitches.

For example, if the set No. of start tacking stitches is 4 stitches and [BTO] setting value is 20 stitches,

the actual No. of start tacking stitches will be 24 stitches (4+20).

If full heeling is performed immediately after start tacking stops, end tacking will not be performed,

and the sewing machine will stop after thread trimming.

ON The sewing machine temporarily stops immediately before end tacking stitch (Regardless of the

position, the sewing machine stops at DOWN popsition.).

Stop time can be adjusted with the function of stop time CT.

No. of stitch compensation BT4.

for end tacking alignment

No. of tacking stitches (+) BTP.

15 stitches function

No. of tacking stitches BTO.

addition stitches function

Full heeling function BTT.

immediately

after start tacking stop

Temporary stop CSJ.

immediately before

end tacking stitch

O

O

O

O

O

0

OF

0

ON

OF

0 to F

0 to 99

*

ON

OF

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

BT1 BT2 BT3 BT4

Start End

CautionIf the operation mode during tacking D1 is set to [CST], [CSU] and [CSD],the tacking alignment functions BM, BT1, BT2, BT3 and BT4 will beinvalid.

Relation of no. of compensated stitches and setting value

Setting value 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

No. of compensated –2,1/4 –2 –1,3/4 –1,2/4 –1,1/4 –1 –3/4 –2/4

Setting value 1 0 A B C D E F

No. of compensated –1/4 0 +1/4 +2/4 +3/4 +1 +1,1/4 +1,2/4

Page 101: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 96 -

When both the medium speed signal (medium speed run signal S5, medium speed command

signal SPM) and the end tacking speed run signal S5 V is ON, the speed operation mode can be set.

If both the medium speed signal (S5, SPM) and the end tacking speed run signal (S5 V) is ON, the

speed will be the end tacking speed N.

If both the medium speed signal (S5, SPM) and the end tacking speed run signal (S5 V) is ON, the

speed will be the end tacking speed V.

Determine the type of tacking that can be set with the front and end tacking type ([B], [D] keys) in the

tacking setting mode with setting values 1 to 7.

Once tacking (V tacking)

Double tacking (N tacking)

Triple tacking (M tacking)

4 repeat tacking (W tacking)

5 repeat tacking

6 repeat tacking

7 repeat tacking

If the backstitch related inputs are turned ON during preset stitching, the backstitch solenoid will turn

ON.

The backstitch solenoid drive timing by the backstitch signal S7 is synchronized with the UP position.

(When this function setting is [OF] setting, it will be synchronized with the random position.)

The backstitch solenoid drive timing by the backstitch signal S7 is synchronized with the DOWN

position.

(When this function setting is [OF] setting, it will be synchronized with the random position.)

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

The speed operation SPN.

mode when both

the medium speed

signal and S5 V signal is ON. .

Settable types of tacking BTM.

Input signal S7 operation S7M.

mode during preset

stitching

Manual backstitch S7U.

ON timing 1

Manual backstitch S7D.

ON timing 2

O

O

O

O

O

OF

6

OF

OF

OF

1 to 7

ON

OF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Page 102: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 97 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

When the manual backstitching signal (S7) is OFF setting, the OFF timing of the backstitching output

B will be synchronized with the UP position.

(When this function setting is [OF] setting, it will be synchronized with the DOWN position.)

The maximum tacking stitches can be set.

The No. of maximum tacking stitches will be 99 stitches.

The No. of start and end tacking stitches will be the same stitches, the No. of start and end tacking

stitches A and D can be set by the 2 figures of [A] and [B] of the operation panel, and the No. of start

and end tacking stitches B and C can be set by the 2 figures of [C] and [D] of the operation panel.

The No. of maximum tacking stitches is 15 stitches.

The No. of end tacking stitches with direct heeling will be the No. of stitches C + 1 stitch when

operation mode D1 is set to [D] [M] during tacking.

The operation mode for when the thread trimmer cancel signal (TL) is input will be set.

The tacking cancel signal [BLT] operation is set.

Tacking is prohibited while the tacking cancel signal [BTL] is ON.

The tacking operation is prohibited once after quick pressing (OFF-ON-OFF) of the tacking cancel

signal [BTL].

The start and end tacking cancel signals SE and EB operations are set.

The start tacking operation is prohibited while the start tacking cancel signal SE is ON. (Same for end

tacking cancel signal EB.)

The start tacking operation is prohibited once after quick pressing (OFF-ON-OFF) of the start tacking

signal SE. (Same for end tacking cancel signal EB.)

The OFF timing setting 7BD.

of output B when the backstitching

signal (S7) is OFF setting.

The maximum BTN.

tacking stitches

(maximum stitches is 99 stitches)

No. of end tacking BCC.

stitches during direct heeling

Operation mode during. TLS.

thread trimmer

cancel signal [TL] setting

Input signal BTL BTS.

quick pressing operation

Input signal SB and EB BS.

quick pressing operation

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

OF

ON

Page 103: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 98 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Dmode

+D

When the tacking is set to OFF, if tacking cancel signal (BTL) turns ON, the tacking will be permitted.

(When this function is set to OFF, the tacking will be prohibited.)

If the start tacking validity ([A] key) is set to OFF (–) in the tacking setting mode, start tacking can be

validated by turning the start tacking cancel signal SE ON. (Same for end tacking cancel signal EB.)

When end tacking is set, if the needle UP position priority stop signal PSU turns ON during operation,

the end tacking will not be executed after stopping at the needle UP position. After thread trimming,

the presser foot will lift.

The buzzer of control panel will be validate.

Operation when input BTD.

signal BTL is ON

Operation when input BD.

signal SB and EB tacking

OFF are set

End tacking PNE.

cancel mode

with input signal PSU

The buzzer of BZ.

control panel validity

O

O

O

O

ON

OF

OF

ON

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Page 104: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 99 -

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

Error codes of once ahead to four times ahead are displayed.

For details of error code, refer to [24. Error Display].

Data can be cleared by simultaneously pressing ([A, 1-2] + [D,==>]) keys.

Total integration time of power on is displayed.

Data can be cleared by simultaneously pressing ([A, 1-2] + [D,==>]) keys.

Total integration time of motor run is displayed.

Data can be cleared by simultaneously pressing ([A, 1-2] + [D,==>]) keys.

Error code didplay 1. to 4.

(Once ahead) to

(Four times ahead)

Total integration time P.

of power on

Total integration time M.

of motor run

O

O

O

E- -

0

0

x10

hours

x10

hours

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

E- -

****

****

****

****

Page 105: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 100

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

The input status (ON/OFF) of the input signal IA to IP and I1 to I7.Input display IA. to IP.

I1. to I7.

O – – – ON

OF

CautionCorrespondence of the display and input signal

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

147

136125

114

103

92

81

21

54

87

1110

1413

3

6

9

12

15

II

Lever connector

IH

IG

IB

IA

IC

DisplayInput signal

(Factory setting)

Pedal toe down (S1)

Pedal full heeling (S2)

Pedal light heeling (S3)

Presser foot lifter signal (F)

Input signal (TL)

Backstitching signal (S7)

Input signal (PSU)

Input signal (PSD)

Input signal (S0)

Reserved input signal (IO1)

Reserved input signal (U)

Reserved input signal (NO)

Reserved input signal (NO)

Presser foot lifter signal (F)

Reserved input signal (NO)

IG

IH

II

IF

ID

IE

IA

IB

IC

I1

I2

I4

I5

I6

I7 Option A connector

ID

IE

IF

Sewing machine connector

I4

I5

I7

I6

I1

I2

Option B connector

Page 106: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 101

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

The input status (ON/OFF) of the motor encoder A phase is displayed.

The input status (ON/OFF) of the motor encoder B phase is displayed.

The input status (ON/OFF) of the detector UP signal is displayed.

The input status (ON/OFF) of the detector DN signal is displayed.

Display the angle of current position from down position.

The numerical value that is equivalent to the variable speed voltage VC with the pedal toe down is

displayed. Display range : 000 to 3FF

The numerical value that is equivalent to the variable speed voltage VC with the option B connector

is displayed.

Display range : 000 to 3FF

Encoder signal display ECA.

(A phase)

Encoder signal display ECB.

(B phase)

Detector signal display UP.

(UP signal)

Detector signal display DN.

(DOWN signal)

Display the angle DR.

from down position

Display the voltage of VC1 PD.

Display the voltage of VC2 VC.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

x2

Degree

0 to 180

0 to 3FF

0 to 3FF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

***

***

***

Page 107: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 102

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

The output status (ON/OFF) of the output signal OA to OD, OF, O1 to O7, OJ, OK, OO, OP.Output signal display

OAD. to ODD.

OFD.

O1D. to O7D.

OJD.

OKD.

OOD.

OPD.

X – – – ON

OF

Note : When CPK is OFF on C mode, the O6D function

is invalidated on E mode.

CautionCorrespondence of the display and output signal

DisplayInput signal

(Factory setting)

Thread trimming output (T)

Wiper output (W)

Backstitch output (B)

Thread release output (L)

Presser foot lifter output (FU)

Virtual output1 (OT1)

Output for needle cooler (NCL)

TF output (TF)

OAD

OBD

OCD

ODD

OFD

O1D

O2D

O3D

3

6

9

2

5

8

1

4

7

121110

151413

O4

O5

O7

O6

O1

O2

O3

7 14

6 13

5 12

4 11

3 10

2 9

1 8

OB

OA

OD

OC

1

2

3

4

OF

Presser foot lifter connector

Option B connector

Sewing machine connectorCaution

Output [O4, O5, O6, O7] are not solenoid output signal.

Also these signal are dual port of input and output.

Page 108: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 103

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

The output status (ON/OFF) of the solenoid output OA to OD, OF, O1 to O7, OJ, OK, OO, OP with

the [D,= =>] key ON/OFF is changed.

Do not turn the O4 to O7 outputs ON/OFF with the [D,= =>] key.

Solenoid output

OAO. to ODO.

OFO.

O1O. to O7O.

OJO.

OKO.

OOO.

OPO.

X – – – ON

OF

CautionCorrespondence of the display and output signal

DisplayInput signal

(Factory setting)

Thread trimming output (T)

Wiper output (W)

Backstitch output (B)

Thread release output (L)

Presser foot lifter output (FU)

Virtual output1 (OT1)

Output for needle cooler (NCL)

TF output (TF)

OAO

OBO

OCO

ODO

OFO

O1O

O2O

O3O

3

6

9

2

5

8

1

4

7

121110

151413

O4

O5

O7

O6

O1

O2

O3

7 14

6 13

5 12

4 11

3 10

2 9

1 8

OB

OA

OD

OC

1

2

3

4

OF

Presser foot lifter connector

Option B connector

Sewing machine connectorCaution

Output [O4, O5, O6, O7] are not solenoid output signal.

Also these signal are dual port of input and output.

Note : When CPK is OFF on C mode, the O6O function

is invalidated on E mode.

Page 109: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 104

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Emode

+

+A

1-2

The motor’s rated output value is displayed.

[05] refers to 550 W.

Not used.

The rated input voltage value in the control box is displayed.

[100] refers to 100 V class.

[200] refers to 200 V class.

The control box model name is displayed.

Not used.

SC-380

The data version No. (3-digit alpha-numeral) of the EEPROM is displayed.

The version No. (3-digit alpha-numeral) of the software is displayed.

Display previous simple setting selected.

Rated output display WT.

Voltage display VL.

Model display TP.

Data version No. DV.

Software version No. RV.

Display previous simple T.

setting selected.

O

O

O

O

O

O

55

100

MF

***

***

Watt

Volt

55

75

100

200

N

MF

***

***

****

***

***

****

Page 110: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 105

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification

Ref.page

Fmode

+

+B

SL

The No. of stitches A (delay during chain-off output ON) for chain-off output operation can be set.

When CTR=ON, the No. of stitches for cutter output OFF can be set.

The No. of stitches B (delay during chain-off output OFF) for chain-off output operation can be set.

When CTR=ON, the No. of stitches for cutter output ON can be set.

The No. of stitches C (delay during cutter output ON) during cutter output operation can be set.

The No. of stitches to be stitched before the output BT for the in-tacking signal is turned ON after the

sensor turns OFF can be set.

The No. of stitches to be stitched before the sewing machine stops after the output BT for the in-

tacking signal turns ON can be set.

The No. of stitches to be stitched before the output BT for in-tacking signal is turned OFF after

stitching is started can be set.

The delay time for the output SL to turn from OFF to ON can be set in 2 msec intervals. The cutter

output time setting is also possible.

The delay time for the output SL to turn from ON to OFF can be set in 2 msec intervals. The chain-

off output mesh judgment time setting is also possible.

The No. of set stitches for the output SL can be selected from HOF set No. of stitches (during ON

setting) or SLN set No. of stitches (during OFF setting).

Setting HOF function.

Setting SLN function.

The output of SL for thread dislocation prevention starts when the needle lift operation (US, U, UF) is

completed.

Set No. of stitches COA.

A for cutter output

(Setting the delay

time during chain-off output ON)

Set No. of stitches COB.

B for cutter output

(Setting the delay

time during chain-off output OFF)

Set No. of stitches COC.

C for cutter output

No. of stitches for BT X.

output ON after sensor

OFF setting

No. of stitches for sewing Y.

machine stop after BT

output ON setting

No. of stitches for BT Z.

output OFF after start

of stitching setting

Delay time to when S SD.

output turns from

OFF to ON

Delay time to when SL ED.

output turns from

ON to OFF

No. of set stitches SLH.

during SL output

ON selection mode

SL output start SLK.

position setting

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

0

0

0

0

0

12

0

0

OF

OF

Stitches

Stitches

Stitches

Stitches

Stitches

Stitches

msec

msec

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 508

0 to 508

**

**

**

**

**

**

***

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 19. CUTTER OUTPUT.

Page 111: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 106

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification

Ref.page

Fmode

+

+B

SL

When the SL output operation mode SLS is ON while the motor is stopped, the output of SL for

thread dislocation prevention will start after the thread is trimmed.

If the output SL turns ON during an operation other than tacking, the speed is limited to that set in the

medium speed M.

The output SL is ON even when the motor is stopped.

Virtual output OT1 will be set to blower output of cutter function.

Virtual output OT2 can be used as the chain-off output.

Virtual output OT3 can be used as the cutter output.

The mesh judgment control of cutter specification is added to chain-off output.

Refer to the section [21. Input/output function for signal on C mode setting] for details on the IO2, IR2

and IS2 signal function.

When the IO3, IR3 and IS3 signals are ON, the output is set to the manual cutter output. Refer to the

section [21. Input/output function for signal on C mode setting] for details on the IO3, IR3,and IS3

signal function.

The change status of the IO3, IR3 and IS3 signal photo switch that outputs the cutter output by the

virtual output OT3 can be selected. Refer to the section [21. Input/output function for signal on C

mode setting] for details on the IO3 and IR3 and IS3 signal function.

The cutter output by the OT3 is output at both changes (OFF=>ON) (ON=>OFF) of the IO3, IR3 and

IS3 and IS3 signal function.

The cutter output by the OT3 is output at only the (OFF=>ON) change of the IO3, IR3 and IS3 signal

photo switch.

When the IO3, IR3 and IS3 signals are ON, the virtual output OT3 is turned ON/OFF per set No. of

stitches.(When this is turned ON, the cutter specifications by the sensor will be invalidated.)

The set No. of stitches can be set with the cutter specifications No. of stitches A (non-stitching chain

ON delay) setting COA function, cutter specifications No. of stitches B (non-stitching chain ON

delay) setting COB function and the cutter specifications No. of stitches C (non-stitching chain ON

delay) setting COC function.

Refer to the section [21. Input/output function for signal on C mode setting] for details on the IO3,IR3

and IS3 signal function.

SL output start position SLT.

during SLS function ON setting

Speed limit M except SLL.

tacking and SL on

SL output operation SLS.

during motor stop

OT1 output blower O1B.

output setting

OT2 output chain-off O2M.

output setting

OT3 output cutter O3M.

output setting

Mesh judgment I2M.

control with IR2 input

Setting I * 3 signal for CTY.

manual cutter output

Status of cutter output CTM.

photo switch (I*3) signal

according to OT3 output

Turn OT3 output ON/OFF CTR.

per set No. of stitches

when I*3 signal is ON

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 19. CUTTER OUTPUT.

Page 112: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 107

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Fmode

+

+B

SL

The output of the automatic cutter output is prohibited while the sensor is ON.

The output of the automatic cutter output is prohibited while the sensor is OFF.

The output of the automatic cutter output is prohibited when the sensor input is ON while the sewing

machine is stopped.

Automatic stop and trim setting, after the cutter sensor is turned off and then the number of stitch “C”

set by “COC” function is run.

The IO1,IR1 and IS1 signals and the run output OP1 are set to the cutter BT specifications input/

output signals. Refer to the section [21. Input/output function for signal on C mode setting] for details

on the IO3, IR3 and IS3 signal function.

Only the preset No. of stitches is stitched after the operation signal (S1) is turned OFF.

The roller lift output ROL will turn ON when presser foot lifting output FU, backtacking output B,

virtual output OT2 are ON, and during tacking and thread trimming.

The roller lower No. of stitches is set for the auxiliary feeding rear roller.

Automatic cutter CSC.

output prohibit during

sensor ON

Automatic cutter CEC.

output prohibit

during sensor OFF

Cutter output prohibit CTS.

when sensor is ON

while stopped

Automatic thread trim CAT.

setting after cutter sensor

is turned off

Set I*1 input, NOP CTL.

output to cutter BT

specifications input/output

Preset stitching NMD.

operation after operation

signal OFF

ROL output mode RLM.

No. of stitches setting RLN.

for auxiliary feeding

rear roller

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

0

Stitches

0 to 99

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

****

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 19. CUTTER OUTPUT.

Page 113: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 108

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

The thread trimming timing for each manufacturer’s thread trimming sewing machine can be set.

Same function as the P mode thread trimming mode [TR].

When [PRG] is set, the sewing machine operation and thread trimming timing can be set when

combined with the functions [TRM], [LTM] or [LLM].

The motor operation mode during thread trimming can be set when thread trimming mode TR is set

to [PRG].

The motor will run for the lockstitch thread trimming sewing machine.

The motor will run for reverse thread trimming.

The motor will run (A mode) for the chain stitch thread trimming sewing machine.

The motor will run (B mode) for the chain stitch thread trimming sewing machine.

The motor will run with special functions for the lockstitch thread trimming sewing machine. The

motor stop time TD before thread trimming will be the needle UP position reference.

The motor will run with special functions for the lockstitch thread trimming sewing machine. The

motor stop time TD before thread trimming will be the needle DOWN position reference.

Thread trimming mode TR becomes effective when [PRG] is set.

The output timing mode of the thread trimming output (T) can be selected.

For the details of the selection of the output timing of thread trimming output (T), refer to [12.1) Thread

trimming timing when thread trimming mode TR setting is PRG].

Thread trimming mode TR becomes effective when [PRG] is set.

The output timing mode of the thread release output (L) can be selected.

For the details of the selection of the output timing of thread release output (L), refer to [12.1) Thread

trimming timing when thread trimming mode TR setting is PRG].

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start angle of the thread trimming

output (T) can be set.

Set according to the thread trimming output (T) timing chart.

Thread trimming mode TR.

Motor operation TRM.

mode during

thread trimming

Thread trimming LTM.

output (T) output mode

Thread release LLM.

output (L) output mode

Thread trimming TS.

output start angle

O

O

O

O

O

M1

LK

T2

L2

24

Degree

M1

to RK

LK

RK

KA

KB

UP

DN

T1

T2

T3

T4

TK

TS

T7

L1

L2

L3

L4

LK

LS

L7

******

0 to 360

Page 114: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 109

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output end angle of the thread trimming

output (T) can be set.

Set according to the thread trimming output (T) timing chart.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start angle of the thread release

output (L) can be set.

Set according to the thread release output (L) timing chart.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output end angle of the thread release

output (L) can be set.

Set according to the thread release output (L) timing chart.

The output start time of the thread trimming output (T) for chain stitch sewing machine can be set.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start time of the thread trimming

output (T) for lock stitch sewing machine can be set. Set according to the thread trimming output (T)

timing chart.

The output time of the thread trimming output (T) for chain stitch sewing machine can be set.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output time of the thread trimming output (T)

for lock stitch sewing machine can be set. Set according to the thread trimming output (T) timing

chart.

The output start time of the thread release output (L) for chain stitch sewing machine can be set. The

output start time of the thread release output (L) during chain stitching thread trimming timing A can

be set.

The chain stitching thread trimming timing B is invalid at this time.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start time of the thread release output

(L) for lock stitch sewing machine can be set. Set according to the thread release output (L) timing

chart.

The output time of the thread release output (L) for chain stitch sewing machine can be set. The

output time of the thread release output (L) during chain stitching thread trimming timing A can be

set.

The chain stitching thread trimming timing B is invalid at this time.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output time of the thread release output (L)

for lock stitch sewing machine can be set. Set according to the thread release output (L) timing chart.

The output start time of the thread release output (L) during chain stitching thread trimming timing B

can be set. The chain stitching thread trimming timing A is invalid at this time. The output start time

of the output (TF) can be set.

Set according to teach output’s timing chart.

Thread trimming TE.

output angle

Thread release LS.

output start angle

Thread release LE.

output angle

Thread trimming T1.

output start time

Thread trimming T2.

output time

Thread release L1.

output start time

Thread release output time L2.

Thread release outpu R1.

start time

(Output TF start time)

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

30

188

134

20

90

150

70

40

Degree

Degree

Degree

msec

msec

msec

msec

msec

0 to 360

0 to 360

0 to 360

0 to 998

0 to 998

0 to 998

0 to 998

0 to 508

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

***

Page 115: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 110

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

The output time of the thread release output (L) during chain stitching thread trimming timing B can

be set. The chain stitching thread trimming timing A is invalid at this time.

The output time of the output (TF) can be set.

Set according to teach output’s timing chart.

The time of when the sewing machine begins condensed stitching after the condensed stitching

(CH) turn ON during start/end condensed stitching can be set.

However, during the end condensed stitching in the chain stitching thread trimming timing B, this

time [R3] will be the time for end condensed stitching after the thread release output (L) turns OFF.

(If end condensed stitching is not set, the time will be that for the needle to rise from the DOWN to UP

position after the thread release output (L) is turned OFF.)

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start time of the wiper output (W) can

be set. Set according to the wiper output (W) timing chart.

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output time of the wiper output (W) can be

set. Set according to the wiper output (W) timing chart.

The output timing mode of the wiper outputÅiWÅjcan be set. The timing that the wiper output W is

turned OFF can be set with the thread trimming signal S2. Refer to [12 . 1)]. Thread trimming timing

when thread trimming mode TR setting is [PRG] for details on setting the OFF timing.

If the S2 signal turns OFF within the wiper output W set time, the W output will turn OFF after the set

time has passed. If the S2 signal turns OFF after the wiper output W set time has passed, the W

output will turn OFF after the set time has passed.

If the S2 signal turns OFF within the wiper output W set time, the W output will turn OFF after the set

time has passed. If the S2 signal turns OFF after the wiper output W set time has passed, the W

output will turn OFF when the S2 signal turns OFF.

If the S2 signal turns OFF without the wiper output W set time, the W output will turn OFF when the

S2 signal turns OFF. If the S2 signal turns OFF after the wiper output W set time passes, the W

output will turn OFF after the set time has passed.

Thread release output R2.

time (TF output time)

Condensed stitching R3.

start time

(Stop time before

thread trimming)

Wiper output start time W1.

Wiper output time W2.

Wiper output WMD.

operation mode

O

O

O

O

O

66

50

10

8

W

0 to 508

0 to 508

0 to 998

0 to 999

msec

msec

msec

x10

msec

***

***

***

***

W

OR

AN

***

***

***

***

Page 116: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 111

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

This setting is valid when the reverse run needle setting after thread trimming RU is ON. When the

reverse run needle lifting is completed after the thread is trimmed, the W output will turn ON.

If the S2 signal turns OFF within the wiper output W set time, the W output will turn OFF after the set

time has passed. If the S2 signal turns OFF after the wiper output W set time has passed, the W

output will turn OFF after the set time has passed.

This setting is valid when the thread trimming motor operation mode TRM is set to KB. The W output

will start before the short stitch.

If the S2 signal turns OFF within the wiper output W set time, the W output will turn OFF after the set

time has passed. If the S2 signal turns OFF after the wiper output W set time has passed, the W

output will turn OFF after the set time has passed.

This setting is valid when the thread trimming motor operation mode TRM is set to KB. The W output

will start before the sort stitch. The W output will turn OFF when the set time has passed after the

thread trimming operation is completed.

RU

CH

FW

Page 117: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 112

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

When the thread trimming mode TR is set to [PRG], the output start time for the presser foot lifting

output (FU) is set.

Set according to the presser foot lifting output (FU) timing chart.

The time for the motor to start driving after the presser foot output FU is turned OFF when pedal toe

down or external run signal (S0,S1) ON during presser foot lifting can be set in 2 millisecond units.

The interlock time that prohibits operation during thread trimming can be set.

Manual calculation will be used during the [P] mode thread trimming (TR) timing [PRG] ,[KA3], [KA4],

[KB3], [KB4], so the setting is valid.

[KA1], [KA2], [KB1], [KB2] are for automatic calculation and cannot be set.

The interlock time during the no thread trimming timing can be set.This is valid when the [P] mode

thread trimming timing [NO] or thread trimming release signal (TL) is turned ON.

After the motor stops, it will start rotating after the thread trimming output T turns ON and the delay

time has passed. The delay time can be set by the [TD] function.

The motor stop time before thread trimming during lock stitch can be set in 2 msec intervals. The

output R output time during chain stitch can be set in 2 msec.

When the chain stitch mode is set, it is possible to set to the delay time of the motor “R3”. Please refer

to “12 .1) Thread trimming timing when thread trimming mode TR setting is PRG” about the delay

time setting.

Delay time before reverse run (RU operation) after thread trimming is completed can be set with RT

when the thread trimming reverse needle lift RU is set to ON.

When reverse needle lift after thread trimming RU is ON and RUS is ON, the delay time before the

motor reverse run after thread trimming can be set in 2 msec intervals.

Cannot be used.

If the pedal is toed down or external output signal (S2) is turned ON during the wiper output time [W2]

(after thread trimming interlock time),the wiper output time [W] will turn OFF.

The presser foot lifting output (FU) will also turn OFF simultaneously, and the sewing machine will

run after the [FD] time.

Use this for the air type wiper. This is effective for standing operation (automatic machine operation).

Presser foot lifting F1.

output start time

Time to motor drive FD.

after presser foot

lifter bring down

Interlock time IL.

during thread trimming

Interlock time during IT.

no thread trimming

Motor rotation after TDS.

motor stop before

thread trimming

Motor stop time during TD.

lockstitch and R output

time during chain

stitch

Delay setting before RUS.

reverse run during RU

setting

Delay setting before RT.

reverse run during

RU setting

Reverse run needle RUM.

lifting [RU] after output

T,L and W

Wiper output OFF WS1.

trimming with (S1)

signal

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

140

176

140

0

OF

50

OF

76

OF

OF

msec

msec

msec

msec

msec

msec

0 to 998

0 to 998

0 to 998

0 to 510

0 to 508

0 to 508

***

***

***

***

ON

OF

***

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

***

***

***

***

***

Page 118: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 113

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Gmode

+

+C

If the sewing machine pulley is rotated by hand and set to 1 position while the sewing machine is

stopped before thread trimming, if the needle UP position is 2 position, the needle DOWN position

will shift.

To return to the original stop position after that, fully heel the pedal, or set the operation mode by

turning thread trimming signal (S2) ON.

The same operation as then next [S2P] setting value ([NO], [TR], [PS]) is executed.

The thread trimming operation is executed according to the thread trimming mode TR setting value

([KA1], [KA2], etc.).

The thread mode started with the full pedal heeling or thread trimming signal (S2) ON when rotating

the sewing machine pulley, etc., manually, and leaving the UP position when in 1 position, and

leaving the DOWN position when in 2 position.

When [KA1] to [KA4] of the thread trimming mode [TR] are set, the thread trimming operation will be

performed according to the settings after the needle is lifted.

When [KB1] to [KB4] are set, the thread trimming operation will be performed according to the

settings after the needle is lowered.

The presser foot lifting operation will be executed after the needle is lifted. The thread trimming

operation will not be executed.

The sewing machine does not rotate or perform thread trimming, and only the presser foot lifting

operation is executed.

The sewing of the solenoid output [OT1] manual/automatic output is selected.

The solenoid output [OT1] will be set to manual. The solenoid input signal IO1 is validated.

The solenoid output [OT1] will be set to manual. The solenoid input signal IO1 is validated.

This is valid when the solenoid output [OT1] manual/automatic output change is set to automatic.

If the pedal is toed down or the external run signal (S00, S1, SH) is turned ON while the solenoid

output [OT1] is ON, the OT1 output will turn OFF after the set No. of stitches.

The weak brake will turn ON when the wiper output (W) turns ON.

When the thread trimming output T mode LTM for lockstitch is set to [T1], [T2] or [T3], after the motor

stops, it will start again after the thread trimming output T turns ON and the delay time has passed.

Set time can be set by the [TD] function.

Operation mode with S2T.

thread trimming signal

to shift the needle stop

position and return to

the original needle stop

position before

the thread trimming signal

Operation mode with S2P.

thread trimming signal

when shifting the needle

stop position before

the thread trimming signal

Solenoid output OT1 MAN.

manual/automatic change

Setting of no. of stitches HOF.

during MAN [OFF]setting

Weak brake ON WB.

simultaneously with

wiper output (W)

Motor rotation operation TDT.

when LTM function is set to

T1,T2 or T3

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

TR

ON

7

OF

OF

Stitches

0 to 99

ON

OF

TR

PS

NO

ON

OF

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

Page 119: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 114

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Hmode

+

+D

The upper limit value of the maximum speed [H] in P mode is set.

A value that exceeds the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the maximum speed [H].

The factory setting [90] refers to [90x100=9000] r/min.

The lower limit value of the maximum speed [H] in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the maximum speed [H].

The upper limit value of the maximum speed [L] in P mode is set.

A value that exceeds the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the low speed [L].

The factory setting [5] refers to [5x100=500] r/min.

The lower limit value of the low speed [L] in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the low speed [L].

The upper limit value of the thread trimming speed [T] in P mode is set.

A value that exceeds the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the thread trimming speed [T].

The factory setting [5] refers to[5x100=500] r/min.

The lower limit value of the thread trimming speed [T] in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set this limiter cannot be set for the thread trimming speed [T].

The upper limit value of the start/end tacking (condensed stitching) speed in P mode is set.

A value that exceeds the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the start/end tacking (condensed

stitching) speed.

The factory setting [30] refers to [30x100=3000] r/min.

The lower limit value of the start/end tacking (condensed stitching) speed in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the start/end tacking (condensed

stitching) speed.

The upper limit value of the medium speed [M] in P mode is set.

A value that exceeds the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the medium speed [M].

The factory setting [90] refers to [90x100=9000] r/min.

Upper limit of LHH.

maximum speed [H]

Lower limit of LHL.

maximum speed [H]

Upper limit of LLH.

low speed [L]

Lower limit of LLL.

low speed [L]

Upper limit of LTH.

thread trimming

speed [T]

Lower limit of LTL.

thread trimming

speed [T]

Upper limit of LNH.

start/end tacking

(condensed stitching)

speed

Lower limit of LNL.

start/end tacking

(condensed stitching) speed

Upper limit of LMH.

medium speed [M]

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

90

0

5

0

5

0

30

0

90

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

Page 120: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 115

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Hmode

+

+D

The lower limit value of the medium speed [M] in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the medium speed [M].

The upper limit value of the medium speed [M] in P mode is set.

A value that exceedsthe value set in this limiter cannot be set for the medium speed [M].

The factory setting [30] refers to [30x100=3000] r/min.

The lower limit value of the medium speed [S] in P mode is set.

A value that is lower than the value set in this limiter cannot be set for the medium speed [S].

Lower limit of LML.

medium speed [M]

Upper limit of LSH.

slow start speed [S]

Lower limit of LSL.

slow start speed [S]

O

O

O

0

30

0

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

x100

r/min

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

**

**

**

**

**

**

Page 121: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 116

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Jmode

+

+A

1-2

+B

SL

The simple setting mode (program mode [1] for Mitsubishi thread trimming sewing machine) cannot

be entered.

([↓ ]+[A]+[B] key operation will not be possible.)

The [P] mode thread trimmer mode, TR cannot be entered.([↓ ]+[↑ ] key operation (program

mode P) will be possible.) The thread trimmer mode [G] cannot be entered.

([↓ ]+[↑ ]+[C] key operation will not be possible.)

Rotation direction changeover ([↓]+[M] key operationÅjduring the normal mode will not be possible.

1-2 position changeover ([A] key operation) during the normal mode will not be possible.

Slow start validity changeover ([B] key operation) during the normal mode will not be possible.

Speed setting operation of normal mode ([C] key and [D] key operation) jwill not be possible.

Not used.

Start tacking validity changeover ([A] key operation) during the tacking mode will not be possible.

The No. of start tacking stitches setting ([A], [B] key operations) during the tacking mode will not be

possible.

End tacking validity changeover ([C] key operation) during the tacking mode will not be possible.

The No. of end tacking validity changeover ([C], [D] key operations) during the tacking mode will not

be possible.

Start tacking type setting ([B] key operation) during the tacking mode will not be possible.

End tacking type setting ([D] key operation) during the tacking mode will not be possible.

Simple setting mode for MAC.

Mitsubishi thread trimming

sewing machine prohibit

[P], [G] mode thread TRC.

trimmer mode TR prohibit

Rotation direction CWC.

changeover prohibit

1-2 position changeover 12C

prohibit

Slow start changeover SLC.

prohibit

Speed setting key SPC.

changeover prohibit

JKC.

Start tacking validity SBC.

changeover prohibit

No. of start tacking SNC.

stitches changeover

prohibit

End tacking validity EBC.

changeover prohibit

No. of end tacking ENC.

stitches changeover prohibit

Start tacking type SKC.

changeover prohibit

End tacking type EKC.

changeover prohibit

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

ON

OF

ON

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Page 122: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 117

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Jmode

+

+A

1-2

+B

SL

Preset stitching validity and backtacking validity changeover operation ([M] key operation) in the

pattern mode will not be possible.

No of preset stitching stitches and No. of backtacking times setting operation ([C], [D] key operations)

in the pattern mode will not be possible.

Preset stitching, backtacking and control switch panel data play mode changeover ([D] key operation)

in the pattern mode will not be possible.

Panel switch operation ([M], [A], [B], [C], [D] key operations) during the normal mode, tacking mode

and pattern mode will not be possible.

However, changeover into each mode will be possible.

Pattern stitching TSC.

validity changeover prohibit

Pattern stitching No. TNC.

of stitches and times

changeover prohibit

Pattern mode pattern MDC.

changeover prohibit

Panel switch PSW.

operation prohibit

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

Page 123: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 118

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Qmode

+A

1-2

+C

The virtual operation signal S1 is turned ON when the variable speed voltage VC1 and VC2 exceeded

the set voltage level.

The voltage level of the variable speed voltage VC1 and VC2 where virtual run signal S1 turns ON.

The voltage level hysteresis width for judging the ON/OFF of the virtual S1 signal when VCS turns

ON can be set.

The voltage curve of the variable speed voltage VC1 is reversed.

The VC1 input range is set to 0 to 5 V.

VC1 maximum input voltage is set to 5 V.

VC1 maximum input voltage is set to 12 V.

The external analog input VC2 function is set.

Speed command input

The virtual S1 signal turns on with the input voltage, and the sewing machine runs. This also acts as

the speed command input.

The VC2 input acts as the variable resistor on the control box panel, and the variable resistor is

invalidated.

During operation with the BC and BCR input, the speed set with the program P mode C8 is invalidated,

and the speed is controlled with the VC2 input.

The speed control input for reciprocal stroke change.

The value set in the program P mode M is invalidated, and the middle speed is controlled with the

VC2 input voltage.

Virtual input IO1 is selected.

The external analog input VC2 curve is reversed.

The VC2 input rang is set to 0 to 5 V.

VC2 maximum input voltage is set to 5 V.

VC2 maximum input voltage is set to 12 V.

Virtual S1 operation VCS.

with VC1 levels

Setting of VC1 and VC2 VCL.

where virtual

S1 turns ON

Input voltage hysteresis VCD.

during virtual S1 signal

ON/OFF by VC1 and VC2 level

VC1 curve V1R.

reversal mode

VC1 input 5 V/12 V V15.

changeover mode

VC2 operation mode VC2.

VC2 curve V2R.

reversal mode

VC2 input 5 V/12 V V25.

changeover mode

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

OF

24

4

OF

OF

LM

OF

OF

1 to 99

0 to 99

ON

OF

**

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

VC

VS

VR

BC

LM

MD

1

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

Page 124: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 119

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Qmode

+A

1-2

+C

The inflection point is set when using the reciprocal stroke change specification speed limiter process

(VC2=LM.)

Setting inflection point 1

Setting inflection point 2

The speed limit is valid only if the presser foot is rising when the VC2 operation mode is set to LM or

the medium speed limit function LIM. Is set to ON during OT1 output ON.

The speed limit is valid only if the virtual output OT2 is ON when the VC2 operation mode is set to LM

or the medium speed limit function LIM. Is set to ON during OT1 output ON.

Speed limiter curve VL1.

inflection point 1 percentage

Speed limiter curve VP1.

inflection point 1 point

Speed limiter curve VP2.

inflection point 2 point

Operation speed limit FLM.

specification mode 1

Operation speed limit 2LM.

specification mode 2

O

O

O

O

O

56

39

42

OF

OF

%

1 to 99

1 to 99

1 to 99

**

**

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

**

Page 125: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 120

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Qmode

+A

1-2

+C

The middle speed during the speed limit process is read into the speed command value (speed high

speed signal SPH, speed end tacking signal SPB, speed medium speed signal SPM, high speed

run signal S4, end tacking speed run signal S5 V, medium speed run signal S5) other than the low

speed from an external source by the digit.

The speed during stitching other than tacking is limited by the digital speed setting (LED C and D) on

operation panel.

The sewing machine detector error E8 will be ignored.

If a signal is not received from the sewing machine detector within a set time during operation, the

detector error E8 will not be displayed.

If a signal is not received from the sewing machine detector within a set time during operation, the

detector error E8 will be displayed and the sewing machine will stop.

The thread break detector is validated.

The operation after the thread break is detected (thread break sensor detection) is set.

The operation continues, and the thread break sensor output THO turns ON.

The sewing machine stops after the thread trimming, and then the thread break sensor output THO

turns ON.

The sewing machine stops normally, and then the thread break sensor output THO turns ON.

The speed to ignore the thread break sensor can be set.

Setting the number of stitch that the sensor of thread break detector becomes valid from first stitch.

The No. of stitches to judge the thread break detection when the thread break sensor input continues

for a certain number of stitches can be set.

Speed command value LMD.

correctly by middle speed

digital during speed

limit process.

Speed limit with digital HMD.

speed setting on

operation panel

Ignore detector error E8C.

Thread break sensor valid TH.

Operation after thread TST.

break sensor detection

Speed to ignore B.

thread break sensor

No. of stitches to THS.

ignore thread break

sensor after starting stitching

Number of stitches THF.

for judgment of

thread break.

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

r/min

Stitches

Stitches

OF

OF

OF

OF

TR

600

7

0

0 to 8999

0 to F

0 to F

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

NO

TR

ST

****

**

**

****

**

**

Page 126: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 121

The presser foot lifting output will turn ON by turning ON the presser foot lifting signal F during sewing

machine operation.

Note that the presser foot lifting signal S3 is invalid during sewing machine operation.

The output of the backstitching output (B) with input S7 is inhibited while the virtual output (OT1) is

ON.

The speed will be limited to that set in medium speed M while virtual output (OT1) is ON.

OP1 output will turn ON simultaneously when virtual output (OT1) is ON.

When the lever unit run signal S1 is ON, the presser foot lift signal S3 will be ignored even when

received.

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Qmode

+A

1-2

+C

Operation mode with RFU.

F input during sewing

machine operation

Output of backtacking S7C.

output (B) during OT1

output ON inhibited

Medium speed (M) LIM.

limit mode during OT1

output ON

Simultaneously ON of O1P.

OP1 output during

OT1 output ON

Disregard of S3 LVB.

signal of Lever Unit

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

EEPROM data is returned to EEPROM back-up state.

This function can be used when returning the function setting to the factory setting.

Every time [D,==>] key is pressed for two seconds or more, the mode returns to the normal mode

after copying (factory setting data) to (existing data).

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Rmode

+B

SL

+C

Reset RESET x – – – –

Page 127: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 122

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Smode

+B

SL

+D

This is the virtual output KS1 and KS2 run mode.

During the one needle stitching, half-stitching (one needle stitching signal S01, needle lift signal U,

half-stitching signal UD, backstitching during run signal US, backstitching during run signal

UDS,etc.),The outputs KS1 and KS2 will turn ON.

The KS1 and KS2 output swill turn ON only during normal operation.

The simple sequence start conditions are set.

The simple sequence will not start.

When the input signal I4 (IN4) is ON.

When the thread trimming is completed.

When run starts.

When the motor starts. (This includes while stopped during the one needle stitching run.)

When stitching starts after thread trimming.

When start tacking is completed. (If the start tacking setting is OFF, the operation will be identical to

[TR].)

Normal starting.

The simple sequence end conditions are set.

The simple sequence is not compulsorily ended.

When the input signal (15) is ON.

When the thread trimming is completed.

When run starts.

When the motor stops. (This includes while stopped during the one needle stitching run.)

When stitching starts after thread trimming.

When start tacking is completed. (When the start tacking setting is [OF], the operation will be identical

to [TR] setting.

The use is prohibited.

[Time] / [No. of Stitches] selection for start of KS1 output. The [Time] / No. of Stitches] can be set with

the KS1 output start [Time] / [No. of Stitches] setting K11.

The KS1 output start time can be set with a No. of stitches.

The KS1 output start time can be set as a time. (10 msec unit)

This is the simple sequence output KS1 output time/output No. of stitches setting changeover function.

The [Time] / [No. of Stitches] can be set with the KS1 output [Time] / [No. of Stitches] setting K12.

The KS1 output time can be set with a No. of stitches.

The KS1 output time can be set as a time. (10 msec unit)

KS1,KS2 output run KSM.

mode

Simple sequence SQS.

start conditions

When the motor stops SQE .

(This includes while

stopped during the one

needle stitching run.)

Simple seuence

end conditions

This is the simple NS1.

sequence output KS1

output start time/output

start No. of stitches

setting changeover function.

[Time]/[No. of Stitches] NE1.

selection for KS1 output

O

O

O

O

O

OF

NO

NO

OF

OF

ON

OF

NO

IN

T

R

S

TR

SB

GO

NO

IN

T

R

S

TR

SB

GO

ON

OF

ON

OF

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 15. SIMPLE SEQUENCE.

Page 128: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 123

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Smode

+B

SL

+D

The simple sequence output KS1 output start reference is set. The setting time can be set with the

KS1 output start [Time]/[No. of stitches] setting K11.

Using the input signal 12 ON as a reference after the start conditions are established, the KS1 output

will turn ON after the set time has passed.

Using the start conditions establishment as a reference, the KS1 output will turn ON after the set time

has passed.

The simple sequence output KS1 output end reference is set. The setting time can be set with the

KS1 output [Time]/[No. of Stitches] setting K12.

Using the input signal 12 OFF as a reference after the KS1 output turns ON, the KS1 output will turn

OFF after the set time has passed.

Using the KS1 output ON as a reference, the KS1 output will turn OFF after the set time has passed.

Selection stitch amount and time till ON for simple sequence output “KS2” (Amount have to be set at

“K21”)

Stitch amount is counted till ON

Time is counted till ON (10 mill-second per each)

Selection stitch amount and time till OFF for simple sequence output “KS2” (Amount have to be set

at “K22”)

Stitch amount is counted till OFF.

Time is counted till OFF (10 mill-second pre each)

Setting start condition of counting till ON for simple sequence output “KS2”.

When Input signal “I7” become ON after the count start condition was established, counting will start.

When the count start condition is established, counting will start.

Setting start condition of counting till ON for simple sequence output “KS2”.

When Input signal “I7” become OFF after the count start condition was established, counting will

start.

When the count start condition is established, counting will start.

Selection stitch amount and time till ON for simple sequence output “KS3” (Amount have to be set at

“K21”)

Stitch amount is counted till ON.

Time is counted till ON (10 mill-second per each)

When the count start condition is established, counting will start.

KS1 output start S1S.

reference setting.

KS1 output end S1E.

reference setting.

KS2 : Selection of NS2.

Stitch amount and time till ON

KS2 : Selection of NE2.

Stitch amount and time till OFF

KS2 : Setting of count S2S.

condition till ON

KS2 : Setting of count S2E.

condition till OFF

KS3 : Selection of Stitch NS3.

amount and time till ON

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

OF

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 15. SIMPLE SEQUENCE.

Page 129: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 124

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Smode

+B

SL

+D

Selection stitch amount and time till OFF for simple sequence output “KS3” (Amount have to be set

at “K22”)

Stitch amount is counted till OFF

Time is counted till OFF (10 mill-second per each)

Setting start condition of counting till ON for simple sequence output “KS3”.

When Input signal “I6” become ON after the count start condition was established, counting will start.

When the count start condition is established, counting will start.

Setting start condition of counting till OFF for simple sequence output “K3”.

When Input signal “I6” become OFF after the count start condition was established, counting will

start.

When the count start condition is established, counting will start.

The output start time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS1 can be set.

When using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting

value will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

The output time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS1 can be set. When

using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting value

will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

The output start time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS2 can be set.

When using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting

value will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

The output time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS2 can be et. When

using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting value

will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

KS3 : Selection of NE3.

Stitch amount and time till OFF

KS3 : Setting of count S3S.

condition till ON

KS3 : Setting of count S3E.

condition till OFF

KS1 output start K11.

[Time]/[No. of stitches] setting

KS1 output K12.

[Time]/[No. of stitches] setting

KS2 output start K21.

[Time]/[No. of stitches] setting

KS2 output K22.

[Time]/[No. of stitches] setting

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

OF

OF

OF

7

7

7

7

x10

msec

stitch

x10

msec

stitch

x10

msec

stitch

x10

msec

stitch

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 15. SIMPLE SEQUENCE.

Page 130: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 125

Modename Function name

Operability

Factorysetting Unit

Settingrange

Digital display

Functionname

SettingSpecification Ref.

page

Smode

+B

SL

+D

The output start time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS3 can be et.

When using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting

value will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

The output time/output start No. of stitches for the simple sequence output KS3 can be et. When

using time, the setting value will be (7) x10=70 msec. When using No. of stitches, the setting value

will be (7) x1=7 stitches.

This is the output KS1 run mode for when the simple sequence start conditions [SQS] are set to NO.

The KS1 output is output each time the start conditions are established.

The KS1 output is output each time the start conditions are established after thread trimming.

Running is prohibited while the output KS1 is ON. (This is valid only when the simple sequence start

conditions [SQS] are set to NO.)

The K11 and K12 timers will be cleared and the KS1 output will be turned OFF when the sewing

machine stop (motor turns OFF) even when the output KS1 timer is continuing. (This is valid only

when the simple sequence start conditions [SQS] are set to NO.)

The K21 and K22 timers will be cleared and the KS1 output will be turned OFF when the sewing

machine stop (motor turns OFF) even when the output KS2 timer is continuing. (This is valid only

when the simple sequence start conditions [SQS] are set to NO.)

The K31 and K32 timers will be cleared and the KS1 output will be turned OFF when the sewing

machine stop (motor turns OFF) even when the output KS3 timer is continuing. (This is valid only

when the simple sequence start conditions [SQS] are set to NO.)

Increase the number of K11 through K33 by ten. (ex. 10 mS=>100 mS, note: Stitch number is not

changed.)

KS3 output start K31.

[Time]/[No. of Stitches] setting

KS3 output K32.

[Time]/[No. of Stitches] setting

KS1 output run mode K1M.

Run prohibit during K1D.

KS1 output ON

K11,K12 time clear K1C.

during KS1 output ON

K21,K22 time clear K2C.

during KS1 output ON

K31,K32 time clear K3C.

during KS1 output ON

Increase the number KSL.

of K11 through K33 by ten

O

O

X

O

O

O

O

O

7

7

ON

OF

OF

OF

OF

OF

x10

msec

stitch

x10

msec

stitch

0 to 99

0 to 99

**

**

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

ON

OF

**

**

Note) For the details of each function, refer to 15. SIMPLE SEQUENCE.

Page 131: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 126 -

21. INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

FU

NC

TIO

N F

OR

SIG

NA

L ON

C M

OD

E S

ET

TIN

G

1. C m

ode input signal setting table

Input signal

I A. P

S U

Exam

ple

Specification

The sewing m

achine will do nothing even if input N

O is turned O

N.

If input S0 is turned O

N, the sew

ing machine w

ill run at the speedset in low

speed L.

This signal is equivalent to full toe down w

hen using the pedal.It is operated at the speed w

hich was set w

ith the [C, <= =][D

, ==>] key of operation panel w

hen the automatic operation A

T is ON

input S1 at the tim

e of ON

.

If input S5 is turned O

N, the sew

ing machine w

ill run at the speedset in m

edium speed M

.

If input S4 is turned O

N, the sew

ing machine w

ill rum at the speed

set in high speed H.

If input RN

D is turned O

N, the sew

ing machine w

ill run at thespeed set in low

speed L, and when stopping the sew

ing machine

will stop at random

regardless of the needle position.

If input CO

R is turned O

N, correction stitching w

ill be preformed at

the speed set in low speed L.

This signal is equivalent to full heeling when using the pedal.

When S

2 is ON

and thread trimm

ing or needle UP

position stophas been com

peted, the wiper w

ill operate. After that, the autom

aticpresser foot lifting w

ill function while the signal is O

N.

If input S01 is turned O

N, 1 stitch operation w

ill start.

If input U is turned O

N, the needle lift operation w

ill start.

If input UD

is turned ON

, half-stitch operation will start.

The needle is stopped just above the fabric to confirm the fabric

puncture position. Each tim

e the signal turns ON

, the operationw

ill alternate between forw

ard-reverse-forward run. If the pedal is

toed down or the external run signal (S

1) turns ON

after that, forward

run will start form

that position. The needle position stop angle canbe set w

ith needle position stop angle C8 in the [P

] mode.

The needle is stopped just above the fabric to confirm the fabric

puncture position. Each tim

e the signal is turned ON

, the operationw

ill alternate between forw

ard-reverse-forward run. If the pedal is

toed down or the external run signal (S

1) turns ON

after stoppingat a forw

ard run position, forward run w

ill start after reverse run. Ifstopped at a reverse run position, the sew

ing machine w

ill forward

run form that position. The needle position stop angle can be set

with needle position stop angle C

8 in the [P] m

ode.

Reverse run needle lift w

ill be performed to the set angle.

The set angle can be adjusted from

the DO

WN

position to UP

position with reverse run angle K

8 in the [P] m

ode.This is effective for blind stitch sew

ing machine.

No.

1234567891011121314

Setting nam

e

Nothing signal

Low speed run signal

Variable speed run

signal

Medium

speed runsignal

High speed run signal

Stop position random

run signal

Correction stitching

signal

Thread trimm

er signal

1 stitch signal

Needle lift signal

Half-stitch signal

Constant angle

[reverse run/forward

run] signal

Constant angle

[reverse run/forward

run] signal

Constant angle

reverse run signal

Setting value

NO

S0

S1

S5

S4

RN

D

CO

R

S2

S01

UUD

BC

BC

R

US

R

Digital display

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Note 1

Note 2

Page 132: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 127 -

Specification

If input UF is turned O

N, the presser foot w

ill lift after needle lifting.

If input S3 is turned O

N after trim

ming, the presser foot w

ill lift.If input S

3 is turned ON

before triming, the presser foot w

ill lift afterdelay tim

e.The delay tim

e is set by S3D

the [P] m

ode of the 74 page.

If input F is turned ON

, the presser doot lifter operation will start.

If input PS

U is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,the needle w

ill stop at the UP

position after swing P

SU

stitchesand thread trim

ming. The no. of stitches after P

SU

input is set byP

SU

the [P] m

ode of 73 page.

If input PS

D is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,the needle w

ill stop at the DO

WN

position after swing P

SD

stitchesand thread trim

ming. The no. of stitches after P

SD

input is set byP

SU

the [P] m

ode of 73 page.

If input ES

is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running, all

running states will be canceled, and the sew

ing machine w

ill stopw

ith the brakes.

If input SH

is turned ON

, one shot operation will start.

The operation mode set in [P

] mode S

HM

function will be entered.

If input CW

is turned ON

while running w

ith pedal toe down or

external run signal, reverse run will be enabled w

hile the signal isO

N.

If input S6 is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running, thesew

ing machine w

ill stop. If input S6 is turned O

N during thread

trimm

ing, the operation will be com

pleted, and operation will not

be possible until input S6 is turned O

FF.

If pedal full heeling or thread trimm

er signal S2 is turned O

N w

hileinput TL is O

N, the thread w

ill not be trimm

ed.A

fter the thread trimm

er interlock time passes, the presser foot

lifting operation will start.

When T

L of [D] m

ode signal is turned ON

a little time and T

LSsetting is O

N, next thread trim

ming is prohibited at once.

If input SP

L is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running, the

sewing m

achine will run at the speed set in low

speed setting Lw

hile the signal is ON

.

If input SP

M is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,the sew

ing machine w

ill run at the speed set in medium

speedsetting M

while the signal is O

N.

If input SP

B is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running, thesew

ing machine w

ill run at the speed set in end tacking speedsetting V

while the signal is O

N.

If input SP

H is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,the sew

ing machine w

ill run at the speed set in high speed settingH

while the signal is O

N.

If input SP

V is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running, thesew

ing machine w

ill run at the speed proportional to the variablespeed voltage V

C w

hile the signal is ON

.

No.

151617181920212223242526272829

Setting nam

e

Needle lift, presser

foot lift signalP

resser foot liftersignal

Presser foot lifter signal

Needle U

P position

priority stop signal

Needle D

OW

Nposition priority stopsignal

Em

ergency stopsignal

One shot signal

Reverse run signal

Thread trimm

erprotection signal

Thread trimm

er cancelsignal

Low speed signal

Medium

speed signal

End tacking speed

signal

High speed signal

Variable speed signal

Setting value

UF

S3

FPS

U

PS

D

ES

SH

CW

S6

TLSP

L

SP

M

SP

B

SP

H

SP

V

Digital display

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Note 1

Note 2

Page 133: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 128 -

Specification

IIf input BTL is turned O

N, start and end tacking w

ill be prohibitedw

hile the signal is ON

.W

hen BTS

of [D] m

ode is ON

, and BTL signal is turned O

N a little

time, next tacking is prohibited at once.

If input SB

is turned ON

, start tacking will be prohibited w

hile thesignal is O

N.

When B

S of [D

] mode is O

N, and S

B signal is turned O

N a little

time, next start tacking is prohibited at once.

If input EB

is turned ON

, end tacking will be prohibited w

hile thesignal is O

N.

When B

S of [D

] mode is O

N, and E

B signal is turned O

N a little

time, next end tacking is prohibited at once.

If input S70 is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,backstitching (reverse feed) w

ill start.N

othing will happen if input S

70 is turned ON

while the sew

ingm

achine is stopped.

If input UD

S is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,backstitching (reverse feed) w

ill start.H

alf-stitch operation will start if input U

DS

is turned ON

while the

sewing m

achine is stopped.

If input US

is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running,

backstitching (reverse feed) will start.

Half-stitch operation w

ill start if input US

is turned ON

while the

sewing m

achine is stopped.

If input BS

L is turned ON

when the sew

ing machine is running or

stopped, backstitching (reverse feed) will start.

If input UC

R is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,backstitching (reverse feed) w

ill start.1 stitch operation w

ill start if input UC

R is turned O

N w

hile thesew

ing machine is stopped.

If input UB

R is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is running,backstitching (reverse feed) w

ill start.1 stitch operation w

ith backstitching (reverse feed) will start if input

UB

R is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is stopped.

If input I01 is turned ON

, output OT1 w

ill always be turned O

N.

If input I02 is turned ON

, output OT2 w

ill always be turned O

N.

If input I03 is turned ON

, output OT3 w

ill always be turned O

N.

If input IR1 is turned O

N, output O

T1 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is running.

If input IR2 is turned O

N, output O

T2 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is running.

No.

3031323334353637383940414243

Setting nam

e

Tacking cancel signal

Start tacking cancel

signal

End tacking cancel

signal

Backstitching during

run signal

Backstitching during

run signal

Backstitching during

run signal

Backstitching signal

[when running w

henstopped.]

Backstitching signal

when running

Backstitching signal

when running

Signal output to virtual

output 1

Signal output to virtual

output 2

Signal output to virtual

output 3

Signal output to

virtual output 1 duringoperation

Signal output to

virtual output 2 duringoperation

Setting value

BTL

SB

EB

S7

UD

S

US

BS

L

UC

R

UB

R

IO1

IO2

IO3

IR1

IR2

Digital display

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Note 1

Note 2

Page 134: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 129 -

Specification

If input IR3 is turned O

N, output O

T3 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is running.

If input IR1 is turned O

N, output O

T1 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is stopped.

If input IR2 is turned O

N, output O

T2 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is stopped.

If input IR3 is turned O

N, output O

T3 turns O

N only w

hen thesew

ing machine is stopped.

The thread trimm

er output T can be turned ON

or OFF only w

henthe sew

ing machine is stopped.Å

iThread trim

mer solenoid

confirmation signalÅ

j

If input NC

L is turned ON

, the needle cooler output NC

L duringsew

ing machine rotation w

ill forcibly by turned OFF.

1 position will be set forcibly.

If input BK

is turned ON

, the weak brake w

ill turn ON

. Use this w

iththe B

K of the [D

] mode set to [O

F].

This is the cloth edge sensor input.

If input WL is turned O

N, the w

iper output W w

ill not be output.

If the SL signal is O

N, the slow

start operation will be valid. U

sethis w

ith the normal m

ode [B,S

L] key set to [OF].

If input N is turned O

N,preset stitching w

ill start forcibly from that

point.

If input CB

T is turned ON

, continuous backstitching will start forcibly

from that point.

If input FWD

is turned ON

, output OT3, output N

CL and output FU

will be turned O

N forcibly. O

utput RO

L and output PU

L will be

turned OFF forcibly.

If input S5V

is turned ON

, the sewing m

achine will run at the speed

set in end tacking speed V.

If input CC

U is turned O

N, it clears the U

P counter only.

If input CC

D is turned O

N, it clears the D

OW

N counter only.

It can be used as the input signal of needle thread break detector.

No.

444546474849505152535455565758596061

Setting nam

e

Signal output to

virtual output 3 duringoperation

Signal output to

virtual output 1 when

stopped

Signal output to

virtual output 2 when

stopped

Signal output to

virtual output 3 when

stopped

Thread trimm

er outputconfirm

ation signal

Needle cooler output

during rotation forced[O

FF] signal

1 p

ositio

n p

riority

signal

Weak brake [O

N]

signal

Sensor input signal

Wiper output cancel

signal

Slow

start signal

Preset stitching forced

[ON

] signal

Co

ntin

uo

us

ta

ck

stitching forced [ON

]signal

No

n-stitch

ing

fee

dinput

End tacking speed run

signal

Count-U

P clear signal

Count-D

OW

N clear

signal

Needle thread break

detector input signal

Setting value

IR3

IS1

IS2

IS3

TON

NC

L

P12

BK

SE

N

WL

SL

NCB

T

FWD

S5V

CC

U

CC

D

THI

Digital display

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Note 1

Note 2

Page 135: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 130 -

Output signal

0A

TE

xample

Specification

During the no. of the setting needles, S

L output is turned ON

.The setting no. of needles can select S

LN on [P

] mode of H

0Fon[G

] mode by setting S

LH on [F] m

ode

OP

output is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running.

(not including needle lifting during thread trimm

ing).

OP

1 output is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running.

(not including needle lifting during thread trimm

ing).O

P1 output w

ill turn ON

during needle lifting when directly heeling.

OP

1 output is turned ON

while the pedal is toed daw

n, the externaloperation signal (S

0, S1, S

H), full pedal heelim

g or thread trimm

ingsignal (S

2) is ON

.

S1 output is turned O

N w

hen the run signal is ON

except duringon 1 stitch sew

ing.

VA

C output is turned O

N during pedal full heeling or w

hile threadtrim

mer signal S

2 is ON

.

NC

L output is turned ON

while the sew

ing machine is running

(including needle lifting).

VC

M output is turned O

N during pedal full heeling or w

hile threadtrim

mer signal S

2 is ON

while the sew

ing machine is stopped.

BT output is turned O

N during tacking.

RO

L output is turned ON

when presser foot lifter output FU

is ON

,backstitching output B

is ON

, or when input IO

2 signal is ON

.R

OL output is turned O

N w

hile tacking and while thread trim

ming

if RLM

of [F] mode is O

N.

Thread trimm

ing starts.

Thread release operation starts.

Wiper operation starts.

Backstitching (reverse feed) starts.

(Condensed stitch)

CH

2 Output for chain stitches.

TF output for chain stirches.R

efer to “Output TB

,TF timings”.

Behind operation signal O

N, K

S1 output is turned O

N after the

setting delay time. R

efer to “Output K

S1,K

S2,K

S3 tim

ings”.

After the m

otor stopped, KS

1 output is turned ON

after the settingdelay tim

e. Refer to “O

utput KS

1, KS

2, KS

3 timings”.

After trim

ming and stopped up position, K

S3 output is turned O

Nafter setting delay tim

e.R

efer to “Output K

S1,K

S2,K

S3 tim

ings”.

TB O

utput for chain stitches.R

efer to “Output TB

,TF timings”.

No.

1234567891011121314151617181920

Setting nam

e

Output for slow

start

Run output 1

Run output 2

Run output 3

Output for run signal

Output for blow

er

Ou

tpu

t for n

ee

dle

cooler

Ou

tpu

t for va

cuu

msignal

Ou

tpu

t for sig

na

lduring tacking

Roller lift output

Thread trimm

er output

Thread release output

Wiper output

Backstitch output

(Condensed stitch)

[CH

2] output

[TF] output

[KS

1] output

[KS

2] output

[KS

3] output

[TB] output

Setting value

SL

OP

OP

1

OP

2

S1

VA

C

NC

L

VC

M

BT

RO

L

TLWBCH

TFKS

1

KS

2

KS

3

TB

Digital display

Note 1

Note 2

C m

ode output signal setting table

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Page 136: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 131 -

Specification

Presser foot lifter operation starts.

The operation m

ode set in the [P] m

ode FU

M function and F

Ufunction w

ill be entered.

UC

output is turned ON

if at the needle UP

position when the

sewing m

achine is stopped.

UP

W output is turned O

N if at the U

P position w

hen the, sewing

machine is stopped, and w

hile moving from

the UP

position to theD

OW

N position w

hen the sewing, m

achine is running.

DN

W output is turned O

N if at the D

OW

N position w

hen the, sewing

machine is stopped, and w

hile moving from

the DO

WN

position tothe U

P position w

hen the sewing, m

achine is running.

OT

1 output is turned ON

according to each input specificationsw

hile inputs IO1,IR

1 and IS1 are O

N.

OT

2 output is turned ON

according to each input specificationsw

hile inputs IO2,IR

2 and IS1 are O

N.

OT

3 output is turned ON

according to each input specificationsw

hile inputs IO3,IR

3 and IS1 are O

N.

This is output w

hen an error occurs. (Note that this is not output

when error code E

9 occurs.)

When pow

er is turned OFF, IP

F output is turned ON

.(N

ot used)

Not used

Not used

PU

L output is turned ON

during the presser foot lifter operation,during the IO

2 output is ON

.

When +1 up counter does, the [C

UP

] output is turned on.

When detecting thread break detector, TH

O output is turned O

N(W

hen re-operation, the signal is turned off)

FUW

output is turned ON

during the presser foot lifter operation orduring w

iper operation.

In case of the power on, [H

I] output is always O

N.

Nothing is output.

This output becomes O

N w

hen Up-counter becom

es end.This output becom

es OFF w

hen “CC

L” input is turned on.

This output becomes O

N w

hen Dow

n-counter becomes end.

This output becomes O

FF when “C

CL” input is turned on.

No.

21222324252627282930313233343536373839

Setting nam

e

Pre

sser fo

ot lifte

routput

Output for U

P position

when stopped

Needle U

P position

output

Needle D

OW

Nposition output

Virtual output 1

Virtual output2

Virtual output3

Output for error

occurrenceconfirm

ation

Ou

tpu

t for p

ow

er

[OFF] confirm

ation

[A01] output

[A02] output

Puller output

Count up output

Thread break detectoroutput

Va

cuu

m o

utp

ut fo

rholding thread

Alw

ays ON

output

[NO

] output

[CU

E] output

[CD

E] output

Setting value

FUUC

UP

W

DN

W

OT1

OT2

OT3

ER

R

IPF

AO

1

AO

2

PU

L

CU

P

THO

FUW

HI

NO

CU

E

CD

E

Digital display

Note 1

Note 2

Note)

1.T

he setting name w

ill display in the descending order with each press of the [D

] key.2.

The setting nam

e will display in the ascending order w

ith each press of the [C] key.

Page 137: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 132

22. TH

E C

OM

PO

SIT

ION

FIG

UR

E O

F IN

PU

T A

ND

OU

TP

UT

CU

ST

OM

IZA

TIO

N1. Input and output customization

AND module

Setting the logic of inputsignal on program mode

Setting Inputfunction

Setting output functionon program mode C

Setting the logicof output signal

Panelconnector(Input port)

Input controlsection

F/F

Alternate

Reverse

RS flipflop is11,12only

LogicalInput

IAIBIC

IFIG

I1I2I4

I7

IP

Virtualinput

IO1IO2

IR1

S1

F

UBR

NO

Virtualoutput

TLW

FU

OT1

KS1

ROL

HINO

Logicaloutput

OAOBOCODOFO1O2O3

O7OJOKOO

OP

Outputcontrol

Reverse

Chopping

Off timer

On delay

etc.

Connector(Output port)

OA

OB

OF

O3

P

“P” switch oncontrol panel

Reverse(ORL)

Alternative(ORA)

Reverse(ANL)

Alternative(ANA)

OR

AN

R1R2R3

Reverse

R1LR2LR3L

Reverse

N1LN2LN3L

N1N2N3

LED of “P”switch oncontrol panelOR module

Page 138: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 133

2. Input/output direct coupling port (inside connecting port)

OUT-J

* The factory settings of the input function settings [IJ], [IK], [IO] and [IL], [IM], [IN] are all [NO].

* The factory settings of the output function settings [OJ], [OK], [OIO] are all [NO].

* The input function settings [IL], [IM], [IN] must not be used with the default setting [NO].

Setting the logic of inputsignal on program mode

Setting Inputfunction

Setting output functionon program mode C

Setting the logic ofoutput signal

IN-JIN-KIN-O

IN-L

IN-MIN-N

* Not used

Input controlsection

Reverse

Alternate

F/F

LogicalInput

IJIKIO

ILIMIN

Virtualinput

IO1IO2

IR1

S1

NO

Sewingmachinecontrol

Virtualoutput

TLW

FU

OT1

NO

Logicaloutput

OJOKOO

Outputcontrol

ChoppingReverse

Off timerOn delay

etc.

OUT-K

OUT-O

Page 139: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 134

3. Connector input/output common port

Note) Option B connector input/output common portWhen changing the input/output, set the output side to [NO] to use the port for inputs and set the input side to [NO] to use th e port for outputs. The default settings areall [NO].(For example, if the option B connector No.2 pin is to be set to input, set the OUT4, or [O4] function to [NO], and set the req uired input function in IN4, or [I4] function.)The above input/output common port is connected internally, so if a function other than [NO] is set on both the input side and output side, the output side setting willaffect the input side.

Sewing machinecontrol

* The CP output is enabled with the CPK [OF] setting in the C mode.* The division rate can be with the division rate setting [CP] in the [C] mode. (When the setting has been changed, turn the power OFF and ON once.)

Connectorinput/outputcommon port

6

Option A

(CKK=OF)CKD

IN-C(CKK=ON)

* The CKD output enabled with the CKK [OF] setting in the C mode.

CKD output Detector Down Signal

Setting the logic of inputsignal on program mode

Setting Inputfunction

Setting output functionon program mode C

Setting the logic ofoutput signal

2

5

14

13

Option B

IN4

OUT4IN5

OUT5IN6

OUT6IN7OUT7

CP(CPK=OF)

Input controlsection

Reverse

Alternate

F/F

LogicalInput

IC

I4

I5

I6

I7

Virtualinput

IO1IO2

IR1

S1

NO

Sewingmachinecontrol

Virtualoutput

TLW

FU

OT1

NO

Logicaloutput

O4

O5

O6

O7

Outputcontrol

ChoppingReverse

Off timerOn delay

etc.

OUT4

OUT5

OUT6

OUT7

CP output Settingdivision

Page 140: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 135 -

23. HO

W T

O U

SE

TH

E O

PT

ION

CO

NN

EC

TO

RV

ariable operation are possible by adding external signals to the option connector.A

current of approximately 1.5m

A flow

s through the switches used for the input signal, so please use

switch for m

inute current.

1) Connector layout

123

456

456

123

456

123

123

456

369

258

147

1211

10

1514

13

147

136

125

114

103

92

81

12

34

56

12

34

56

Com

munication

Operation panel

LeverE

ncoderD

etectorF

oot lifterO

ption AO

ption BS

ewing

machine

12

Lever connector (white)

Setting function

0VRun signal

Thread trimm

ing signalP

resser foot lifter signalV

ariable speed signal+12V

No.123456

Physics input port nam

e

IGIHIIVC

Rem

arks

S1

S2

S3

VC

Rem

arks

Functions set to the sew

ing machine connectors vary in accordance w

ith the sewing m

achine heads selected.

(Make sure of the sim

ple selecting table for the sewing m

achine heads, 9-3) Program

modes [1] and [2], and the m

arks described

under the setting functions.)

Operation panel/C

omm

unication

No.123456

Signal nam

eR

XD

–TXD

0V+12V–

Encoder

Setting function

0VPhase A

signalP

hase B signal

+12VG

round–

No.123456

Physics input port nam

eR

emarks

EA

EB

Detector

Setting function

0V–Ground

UP

position detectionD

OW

N position detection

+12V

No.123456

Physics input port nam

eR

emarks

UP

DN

Presser foot lifter

Setting function

Presser foot lifter output

Presser foot lifter output

No.12

Physics input port nam

eO

FO

F

Rem

arksFU

-FU

+

No.

1234567891011121314

Sew

ing machine

Physics inputport nam

e0A0BIDIFIE0C0D

Setting function

(A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, O

)T

hre

ad

trimm

er

outputW

iper outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

cancel signalP

resser foot liftersignalB

ac

ks

titch

ing

signalB

ac

ks

titch

ing

outputS

ub-back output

+24V+24VG

round0V0V+24V+24V

Setting function (B

)

Th

rea

d trim

me

routputW

iper outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

cancel signalP

resser foot liftersignalB

ac

ks

titch

ing

signalB

ac

ks

titch

ing

outputS

ub-back output

+24V+24VG

round0V0V+24V+24V

Setting function (K

, M)

Th

rea

d trim

me

routputW

iper outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

protection signalP

resser foot liftersignalT

hre

ad

trimm

er

cancel signalN

ee

dle

c

oo

ler

outputL

ow

er

thre

ad

remove output

+24V+24VG

round0V0V+24V+24V

Setting function (L)

Th

rea

d trim

me

routputW

iper outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

protection signalP

resser foot liftersignalT

hre

ad

trimm

er

cancel signalN

ee

dle

c

oo

ler

outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

output+24V+24VG

round0V0V+24V+24V

Rem

arksS

etting function (N)

Th

rea

d trim

me

routputW

iper outputT

hre

ad

trimm

er

protection signalP

resser foot liftersignalT

hre

ad

trimm

er

cancel signalN

ee

dle

c

oo

ler

outputT

hre

ad

rele

ase

output+24V+24VG

round0V0V+24V+24V

TWTLFS7BL

TWUFS7BL

TWS6FTL

NC

L

SL

TWS6FTL

NC

L

T

TWS6FTL

NC

L

L

Page 141: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 136 -

Connector E

(Option A

: Black)

Setting function (K

, L, M, N

)0VN

eedle UP

position prioritystop signal+12VN

ee

dle

DO

WN

po

sition

priority stop positionN

eedle UP

position outputT

hread trimm

er protectionsignal

No.123456

Physics input port nam

e

IAIBIC

Setting function (A, B, C, D

, F, I, O)

0VNeedle U

P position priority

stop signal+12VN

eedle DO

WN

positionpriority stop signalN

eedle UP

position outputLow

speed run signal

Setting function (E

)0VI05 input siganl

+12VN

ee

dle

DO

WN

po

sition

priority stop signalN

eedle UP

position outputLow

speed run signal

Setting function (G

, H)

0VThread trimm

er safe signal

+12VN

ee

dle

DO

WN

po

sition

priority stop signalN

eedle UP

position outputLow

speed run signal

Setting function (J)

0VEm

ergency stop signal

+12VN

ee

dle

DO

WN

po

sition

priority stop signalN

eedle UP

position outputLow

speed run signal

Rem

arks

PS

U

PS

D

CK

US

O

IO5

PS

D

CK

US

O

S6

PS

D

CK

US

O

ES

PS

D

CK

US

O

PS

U

PS

D

CK

US

6

Setting function (E

)0VO

T1 outputO

T5 outputV

ariable speed comm

andThread trim

mer output

I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VO

T4 outputK

S1 output

–OT3 output

Connector G

(Option B

)

No.123456789101112131415

Physics input port nam

e

O4/I4

O1

VC

2O

5/I5I1I2O

2O

7/I7C

P/O

6/I6O

3

Setting function (A

)0V–O

T1 outputV

ariable speed comm

and–I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler output–P

resser foot lifter signalTF output

Setting function (B

)0V–O

T1 outputV

ariable speed comm

and–I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler outputStart/end tacking cancel signalP

resser foot lifter signalTF output

Setting function (C

)0VM

edium speed signal

OT1 output

Variable speed com

mand

End tacking speed signal

I01 input signal+12V+24VI01 input signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler outputStart/end tacking cancel signalP

resser foot lifter signalTF output

Setting function (D

)0VM

edium speed signal

OT1 output

Variable speed com

mand

End tacking speed signal

I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler output–P

resser foot lifter signalTF output

Rem

arks

OT1

VC

IO1U

NC

L

FTF

OT1

VC

IO1

UNC

LB

TL

FTF

SP

MO

T1V

CS

PB

IO1

IO1

NC

LB

TL

FTF

SP

MO

T1V

CS

PB

IO1UN

CL

FTF

OT1

OT5

VCTIO1UO

T4K

S1

OT3

Setting function (M

)0VN

eedle cooler prohibit signalO

T1 output (Folder)V

ariable speed comm

andR

eset signalS

hort stitch cancel signal+12V+24VFolder input signal0V+24VS

hort stitch outputThread trim

mer knife out signal

Non-stitching feed signal

Non-stitching feed output

No.123456789101112131415

Physics input port nam

e

O4/I4

O1

VC

2O

5/I5I1I2O

2O

7/I7C

P/O

6/I6O

3

Setting function (F, H

, I, O)

0V–OT1 output

Variable speed com

mand

–I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler output––TF output

Setting function (G

)0VO

T1 outputO

T1 outputV

ariable speed comm

and–I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VO

T3 output––O

T2 output

Setting function (J)

0VConstant angle signal

KS

1 outputV

ariable speed comm

and–I01 input signal+12V+24VN

eedle lift signal0V+24VN

eedle cooler output––TF output

Setting function (K

, L, N)

0VNeedle cooler prohibit signal

OT1 output

Variable speed com

mand

Reset signal

Short stitch cancel signal

+12V+24VFolder input signal0V+24VR

oller lift outputThread trim

mer knife out signal

Non-stitching feed signal

Non-stitching feed output

Rem

arks

OT1

VC

IO1U

NC

L

TF

OT1

OT1

VC

IO1

UOT3

OT2

BC

KS

1V

C

IO1

UNC

L

TF

NC

LO

T1

VC

KS

3E

B

IO1

RO

LTO

NF

WD

OT3

NC

LO

T1V

CK

S3

EB

IO1

BT

TON

FW

DO

T3

Functions set to the sew

ing machine connectors vary in accordance w

ith the sewing m

achine heads selected. (Make sure of the sim

ple selecting table for the sewing m

achine heads, 9 - 3) Program

modes [1] and

[2], and the marks described under the setting functions.)

Page 142: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 137 -

The specification

This signal is equivalent to full the dow

n when using

the pedal. It is operated at the speed which w

as set

with the [C

][D]key of operation panel w

hen the

automatic operation A

T is ON

input S1 at the tim

e of

ON

.

This signal is equivalent to full heeling when using the

pedal.

When S

2 is ON

and thread trimm

ing or needle UP

position stop has been completed, the w

iper will

operate. After that, the autom

atic presser foot lifting

will function w

hile the signal is ON

.

If input S3 is turned O

N after trim

ming, the presser foot

will lift.

If input S3 is turned O

N before trim

ing, the presser foot

will lift after delay tim

e. The delay tim

e is set by S3D

the [P] m

ode of the 74 page.

It is speed regulation input from outside. B

y giving

variable speed comm

and voltage (0-11 V), the speed

which is proportional to the voltage is gotten.

This is the power for the variable speed com

mand.

A D

C12 V

(max. 40 m

A) is out put.

Wiper operation starts.

Thread trimm

ing starts.

If pedal full heeling or thread trimm

er signal S2 is turned

ON

while input TL is O

N, the thread w

ill not be trimm

ed.

After the thread trim

mer interlock tim

e passes, the

presser foot lifting operation will start.

When TL of [D

] mode signal is turned O

N a little tim

e

and TLS

setting is ON

, next thread trimm

ing is

prohibited at once.

Thread release operation starts.

If input S7 is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine is

running, backstitching (reverse feed) will start. N

othing

will happen if input S

7 is turned ON

while the sew

ing

machine is stopped.

Backstitching (reverse feed) starts.

(Condensed stitch)

If input F is turned ON

, the presser foot lifter operation

will start.

Presser foot lifter operation starts. The operation m

ode

set in the [P] m

ode FUM

function and FU function w

ill

be entered.

2)The explanation of the input/output signal

Pin num

ber

23456213756421

The input/output signal name

(Factory setting)

Variable speed run signal

S1

Thread trimm

er signalS

2

Presser foot lifter signal

S3

Variable speed

VC

comm

and voltage

Constant voltage

power supply +12 V

Wiper output

W

Thread trimm

er outputT

Thread trimm

erTL

cancel signal

Thread release outputL

Backstitching durin

S7

run signal

Backstitching output

B

(Condensed stitch)

Presser foot lifter signal

F

Presser foot lifter output

FU+

FU-

Physics input

port name

IGIHII

VC

OB

OAIDODIEOCIFOF

Model

name

SC-380

ConnectorLever connectorSewing machine connectorPresser foot lifter

Page 143: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 138 -

The specification

If input PS

U is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine isrunning, the needle w

ill stop at the UP

position aftersw

ing PS

U stitches and thread trim

ming. T

he no. ofstitches after P

SU

input is set by PS

U the [P

] mode of

73 page.The constant voltage pow

er supply. DC

+12 V (m

ax.40 m

A)

If input PS

D is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine isrunning, the needle w

ill stop at the DO

WN

positionafter sw

ing PS

D stitches and thread trim

ming. The no.

of stitches after PS

D input is set by P

SU

the [P] m

odeof 73 page.T

he UP

position is output. This can be used as the

signal for the stitch count, etc. The output voltage is

DC

12 V/5 V

(max. 40 m

A).

The factory setting is 5 V.

If input S0 is turned O

N, the sew

ing machine w

ill run atthe speed set in low

speed L. (CK

D is D

OW

N position

signal output It changes by the CK

K setting of 92 page

C m

ode by S0 and C

KD

.)It is also input/output serving port. W

hen using as theinput, m

ake O4 N

O setting, and w

hen using as theoutput, m

ake I4 NO

setting.O

T1 output is turned O

N according to each input

specifications while inputs IO

1,IR1 and IS

1 are ON

.T

his is the input for external speed comm

and. By

applying the variable speed comm

and voltage, thespeed that is relative to the voltage is obtained.It is an also input/output serving port. W

hen using asthe input, m

ake O5 N

O setting, and w

hen using as theoutput, m

ake I5 NO

setting.If input IO

1 is turned ON

, output OT

1 will alw

ays beturned O

N.

A D

C 12 V

is output (max.50 m

A).This can be used as

the power source for the photoelectric sw

itches in theam

plifier.If input U

is turned ON

, the needle lift operation will

start.N

CL output is turned O

N w

hile the sewing m

achine isrunning (including needle lifting).It is an also input/output serving port. W

hen using asthe input, m

ake O7 N

O setting, and w

hen using as theoutput, m

ake I7 NO

setting.If input F is turned O

N, the presser foot lifter operation

will start.

*S

ame function as that of N

o. 4 pin of sewing m

achineconnector.

TF output for chain stitches.R

efer to pages 55 and 109 for the output timing.

Pin num

ber

23456234567912131415

The input/output signal name

(Factory setting)

Needle U

P position

PS

Upriority stop signal

Constant voltage

+12 Vpow

er supplyN

eedle DO

WN

positionP

SD

priority stop signal

Needle U

P position output

CK

U

Low speed run signal

SO

The signal which

NO

does nothing

Virtual output 1

OT1

Virtual speed com

mand

VC

2

The signal which

NO

does nothing

Signal output to

IO1

virtual output 1R

ated voltage poser+12 V

Needle lift signal

U

Output for needle cooler

NC

L

The signal which

NO

does nothing

The signal which

Fdoes nothing

[TF] outputTF

Physics inputport nam

e

IAIB

IC/C

KD

O4/I4

O1

VC

2

I5/O5

I1I2O2

I7/O7

I6/O6/C

P

O3

Model

name

SC-380

ConnectorOption A connectorOption B connector

Page 144: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 139 -

3) To use as a standing w

ork type sewing m

achine.

The sew

ing machine can be used as a standing w

ork type sewing m

achine with the four connections below

using the lever connector. How

ever, take special care to the intrusion of noise, and use the shortest wiring

possible.

For the standing w

ork, it is recomm

ended to use JUK

I PK

75.

(1)When operating w

ith an external variable resistor

(Control panel auto and A

T in [P

] mode is O

FF

)

Lever (white connector)

S1

S2

S3

VC

External variable

resistor 10 KΩ

(2)For operating w

ith a high speed

(Control panel auto and A

T in [P

] mode is O

N)

Lever (white connector)

S1

S2

S3

Run (H

igh speed)

(3)When operation w

ith high speed and inching (Control panel auto and A

T in [P

] mode is O

FF

)

(a) When using the lever connector

Lever (white connector)

S1

S2

S0

D

R

D : E

quivalent to 1S953 (N

EC

) (VR≧

30 V, IF≧

30 mA

)R

: 1 kΩ 1/2W

higher

(b) When using the lever connector and option connector

Lever (white connector)

Option A

(black connector)

S1

S2

S3

Run

(High speed)

0V12345

Operation (low

speed)6

S0

0 V1

Operation

2

Thread trim

mer

3

Presser foot lifter

4

Variable speed

5com

mand

+12 V

6

0 V1

Operation

2

Thread trim

mer

3

Presser foot lifter

4

Variable speed

5com

mand

+12 V

6

0 V1

Operation

2

Thread trim

mer

3

Presser foot lifter

4

Variable speed

5com

mand

+12 V

6

0 V1

Operation

2

Thread trim

mer

3

Presser foot lifter

4

Variable speed

5com

mand

+12 V

6

Page 145: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 140 -

24. ER

RO

R D

ISP

LAY

When the control box detects an error, the error code is flickered on the operation panel display.

Confirm

the error code, and investigate with the follow

ing table.

Error code

E1

E2

E3

E4

E6

E8

E9

M5

Others

The sewing does not run w

henthe pedal pressed.

The sewing m

achine does notrun at the high speed.

The thread is not trim

med

even with heeling.

The presser foot lifter output

does not operate.

Probable cause

8 A fuse in control box broken.

Is the power voltage too low

?Is the pow

er supply capacity too small ?

Note)

It does this display when pow

er supply is turned OFF, but

this is not an error.Is the w

ire to the motor short-circuited ?

Is the sewing m

achine load torque too high ?Is the pow

er voltage too high ?Is the sew

ing machine inertia too high ?

Is the connector to the motor encoder securely inserted ?

Are the signals from

the motor encoder correct ?

Is the sewing m

achine locked ?Is the m

otor locked ?Is the m

otor connector securely inserted ?

Are the signals from

the motor connector correct ?

Is an extraordinary signal inputted ? (The signal as it repeats ON

/OFF

at the high frequency)D

oes the noise from outside enter an input signal.

Is the position detector connector securely inserted ?

Are the signals from

the detector correct ?(U

P/D

OW

N signal interruption)

Is the solenoid wiring short-circuited ?

Solenoid defect (coil defect)

A error of the copy m

ode using the control panel.Is the control panel connector securely inserted ?The voltage or the type of control panel is difference.

Is the lever unit connector securely inserted ?

Are the operation signals (S

1) from the lever unit broken ?

Is does not displayed 99 in normal m

ode.

Is the variable speed voltage with the pedal toe dow

n low ?

Is the motor pulley diam

eter too small ?

Is the thread trimm

ing signal (S2) from

the lever unit broken ?

Is the cancel thread trimm

er operation S2L O

N ?

Is the light heeling signal (S3) or thread trim

ming signal (S

2) from the

lever unit broken ?Is the presser foot lift signal (F) broken ?

Is the presser foot lift signal (FU) broken ?

InspectionR

eplace the 8A fuse.

Check the pow

er voltage.C

he

ck the

po

we

r sup

ply

capacity.

Check the m

otor wiring.

Check the sew

ing machine.

Check the pow

er voltage.Lengthen the decelerationtim

e. (Refer to D

C in [A

] mode)

Check the connector insertion.

Check the encoder signals.

(Refer [E

] mode)

Check the sew

ing machine.

Check the m

otor.C

heck the motor connector

insertion.C

heck the motor connector.

Check the input signal.

Rem

oves a noise source.C

heck the detector connectorinsertion.C

he

ck the

de

tecto

r UP

/D

OW

N signals. (R

efer to [E]

mode.)

Check the solenoid w

iring.R

eplace the solenoid.

Check the connector insertion.

Check the voltage and the type

are right.

Check the lever unit connector

insertion.C

heck the lever unit signal.(R

efer S1 signal, [E

] mode)

Change 99 using control box

[D] key.

Check the variable speed

voltage. (Refer [E

] mode)

Ch

eck th

e m

oto

r pu

lley

diameter. (R

efer item 4.3)

Check signal S

2, (Refer [E

]m

ode)S

et S2L to O

FF

. (Refer [P

]m

ode)C

heck signals S2 and S

3.(R

efer [E] m

ode)C

heck signal F(R

efer [E] m

ode)C

heck FU output.

(Refer [E

] mode)

Page 146: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 141 -

25. SP

EC

IFIC

AT

ION

SV

oltage and FrequencyS

pecificationsMotorSC-380

Model nam

eV

oltage (V)

Rate output (W

)R

ate speed (r/min)

Rate torque (N

.m)

Model nam

e

Voltage (V

)S

peed controlrange

Solenoid voltage

Range of rating V

oltageA

mbient tem

peratureA

mbient hum

idityS

torage temperature

Altitude

Weight (kg)

Ge

ne

ral

pu

rpo

se

au

tom

atic th

rea

dtrim

mer (V

)

With sew

ing machine

shaft (S/m

in)W

ith motor shaft

(r/min)

550 W3,000 r/m

in1.76 N

m (0.18 K

gm)

70 to 4,000 (MA

X 8,999) S

/min

50 to 3,600 r/min

DC

24 V/30 V

±10 %5 ˚C

to 40 ˚C30 %

to 95 %-25 ˚C

to 55 ˚CU

nder 1000 m above m

ean sea levelM

otor 8.0 kg/Control B

ox : 5.5 kg

110 V signal phase

50/60 Hz

XL-554-10Y

100 to 120 V

XC

-EJK

-10-05

XC

-EJK

: 100-110/110-120 V

230 V single phase, 3-phase 50/60 H

z

XL-554-20Y

, JE type (X

L-554-20CE

)200 to 240 V

XC

-EJK

-20-05JE

type (XC

-EJK

CE

-20-05)

XC

-EJK

: 200-220/220-240 V

Model

Specification

Lever unitX

C-C

L-2

XC

-EJK

Position detector

XC

-KE

-01PJ

(DC

24 V S

etting)

Solenoid

Specifications

Impedance

Solenoid

Specifications

Impedance

OF

(Presser foot lifter output FU)

8 or more

(continuous time rating)

OC

(back stitch output B)

4 or more

(short time rating)

OA

(Thread trimm

ing output T)

4 or more

(short time rating)

O1

(Virtual output1)

4 or more

(short time rating)

OB

(Wiper output W

)

4 or more

(short time rating)

O2

(needle cooler output)

4 or more

(short time rating)

OD

(Thread release L)

4 or more

(short time rating)

O3

(TF output TF)

4 or moer

(short time rating)

(DC

30 V S

etting)

Solenoid

Specifications

Impedance

Solenoid

Specifications

Impedance

OF

(Presser foot lifter output FU)

10 or more

(continuous time rating)

OC

(back stitch output B)

5 or more

(short time rating)

OA

(Thread trimm

ing output T)

5 or more

(short time rating)

O1

(Virtual output1)

5 or more

(short time rating)

OB

(Wiper output W

)

5 or more

(short time rating)

O2

(needle cooler output)

5 or more

(short time rating)

OD

(Thread release L)

5 or more

(short time rating)

O3

(TF output TF)

5 or moer

(short time rating)

Note)

1.In the brackets, it is a factory setting.

2.T

he continuous time rating of “O

F” output is 50 percentage of chopping duty.

Page 147: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

- 142 -

<RE

FE

RE

NC

E> T

AB

LE O

F D

IGIT

AL D

ISP

LAY

Table of digital display

Num

eral0

12

34

56

78

9

Digital display

Num

eralA

BC

DE

FG

HI

J

Digital display

Num

eralK

LM

NO

PQ

RS

T

Digital display

Num

eralU

VW

XY

Z

Digital display

Page 148: SC-380 - Szwalnicze · 2017. 5. 16. · 1 - 1. DRIVE UNIT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. To ensure safe use – Always observe the following items to ensure safe use of the industrial sewing

Please do not hesitate to contact our distributors or agents in your area for further inform

ation when necessary.

*T

he description covered in this engineer's manual is subject to change for im

provement of the

comm

odity without notice.

01 · 03 Printed in Japan (E

)

R

INT

ER

NA

TIO

NA

L SA

LES

H.Q

.8-2-1, K

OK

UR

YO

-CH

O,

CH

OF

U-S

HI, T

OK

YO

182-8655, JAP

AN

PH

ON

E : (81)3-3430-4001 to 4005

FA

X : (81)3-3430-4909 • 4914 • 4984

TE

LEX

: J22967

Copyright C

1998-2001 JUK

I CO

RP

OR

ATIO

N.

All rights reserved throughout the w

orld.